Download Intel AC450NX Stereo System User Manual

AC450NX Rack Server System
Product Guide
Order Number: 702026-003
Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or
otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in Intel’s Terms and
Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied
warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular
purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not
designed, intended or authorized for use in any medical, life saving, or life sustaining applications or for any other
application in which the failure of the Intel product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Intel
may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. No part of this document may be
copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior consent of Intel.
†
Third party brands and names are property of their respective owners.
Copyright  1998-1999, Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Quick Reference and Conventions
For translated warnings, see Appendix C, “Warnings”
Part I: User’s Guide
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running
4 Setup Utility: When to Run
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run
6 SCSI Configuration Utility
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide
Safety Guidelines
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
iii
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
A Regulatory Specifications
B Equipment Log
C Warnings
Conventions
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazard that can cause personal injury or
equipment damage if the hazard is not avoided.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazard that might cause personal injury, damage to
hardware, or software if the hazard is not avoided.
✏
NOTE
Notes provide information and may be used to emphasize a recommended
sequence of steps.
<F1>
A letter, number, symbol, or word enclosed in < > represents a key on your keyboard.
For example, the instruction "press <F1>" means press the key labeled "F1" on your
keyboard.
<Enter>
The <Enter> key is used to enter commands and responses to prompts. Some manuals
refer to <Enter> as RETURN, CARRIAGE RETURN, <CR>, or use an arrow. All of
these terms are interchangeable.
<x + y>
Two or three key names, separated by plus signs, indicate multiple-key entries. For
example, <Ctrl + Alt + Del> means hold down <Ctrl> and <Alt> and press <Del>.
_L
In all tables in this guide, active-low signal names have an “_L” symbol following the
name; for example, DSTBN3_L. Active-high signal names do not have a “_L” suffix.
iv
Contents
Quick Reference and Conventions
For translated warnings, see Appendix C, “Warnings” .......................................................... iii
Part I: User’s Guide ............................................................................................................. iii
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide...................................................................................... iii
Conventions .........................................................................................................................iv
Part I: User’s Guide
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
Server Features.................................................................................................................. 18
Chassis .............................................................................................................................. 21
Controls and Indicators....................................................................................................... 24
Server Security................................................................................................................... 26
Password Protection.................................................................................................. 26
Secure Boot Mode ..................................................................................................... 26
Boot Sequence Control.............................................................................................. 26
Boot Without Keyboard.............................................................................................. 27
Locked Power and Reset Switches............................................................................ 27
Diskette Write Protect ................................................................................................ 27
Video Blanking........................................................................................................... 27
Emergency Management Port (EMP) ........................................................................ 27
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
Selecting a Site .................................................................................................................. 29
Physical Specifications ....................................................................................................... 30
Environmental Specifications.............................................................................................. 30
After Unpacking the Server ................................................................................................ 31
Connecting Peripheral Devices .......................................................................................... 31
Obtaining a Power Cord Set ............................................................................................... 33
Turning on Your Server ...................................................................................................... 33
Power-on Self Test .................................................................................................... 35
Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD ......................................................... 36
Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes...................................................................... 37
Installing Video Drivers....................................................................................................... 37
Installing SCSI Drivers........................................................................................................ 37
Server Won’t Boot From the CD ......................................................................................... 38
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running
Power-on Self Test (POST)................................................................................................ 41
4 Setup Utility: When to Run
When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility ................................................................................... 43
Running the Setup Utility ........................................................................................... 43
Main Menu................................................................................................................. 45
v
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Advanced Menu......................................................................................................... 47
Security Menu............................................................................................................ 51
Server Menu .............................................................................................................. 52
Boot Menu ................................................................................................................. 54
Exit Menu Selections ................................................................................................. 55
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run
When to Run the System Setup Utility................................................................................ 57
What You Need to Do ........................................................................................................ 58
Running the SSU................................................................................................................ 58
Starting the SSU ........................................................................................................ 59
Customizing the SSU................................................................................................. 60
Launching a Task ...................................................................................................... 60
Resource Configuration Add-in (RCA) Window.......................................................... 61
Multiboot Add-in......................................................................................................... 67
Security Add-in .......................................................................................................... 68
System Event Log Manager Add-in ........................................................................... 70
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In ............................................................. 71
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager ..................................................................... 73
Exiting the SSU.......................................................................................................... 74
6 SCSI Configuration Utility
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
How EMP Console Works .................................................................................................. 78
Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 80
Setting Up the Server for the EMP ..................................................................................... 81
Server Menu .............................................................................................................. 81
Console Redirection Submenu .................................................................................. 81
Main EMP Console Window ............................................................................................... 82
Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 82
Status Bar.................................................................................................................. 82
EMP Console Main Menu .......................................................................................... 83
Server Control Operations.................................................................................................. 84
Connect .................................................................................................................... 84
Power On/Off............................................................................................................. 85
Reset ........................................................................................................................ 86
Phonebook ......................................................................................................................... 87
FRU Viewer ............................................................................................................... 88
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility .............................................................................. 89
What You Need to Do ........................................................................................................ 89
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility ............................................................................. 90
Command Line Format .............................................................................................. 90
Parsing the Command Line ....................................................................................... 90
Displaying Usage Information .................................................................................... 90
vi
Contents
Displaying a Given Area ............................................................................................ 92
Using Specified CFG File........................................................................................... 95
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping
Tools and Supplies You Need ............................................................................................ 97
Equipment Log .......................................................................................................... 97
Hot-Swapping a Fan........................................................................................................... 98
Removing a Fan ........................................................................................................ 98
Replacing a Fan....................................................................................................... 100
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping
Hot-docking Bays ............................................................................................................. 101
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 101
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 101
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives ............................................................................................. 102
Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier ................................................. 102
Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-docking Bay................................... 104
Hot-swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive............................................................. 106
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 109
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 109
Hot Swapping a Power Supply ......................................................................................... 110
Removing a Power Supply....................................................................................... 110
Replacing a Power Supply....................................................................................... 112
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide
Safety Guidelines
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 115
Server Precautions .................................................................................................. 115
Equipment Rack Precautions................................................................................... 116
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 119
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 119
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 119
Covers.............................................................................................................................. 119
Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover ........................................................................ 120
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Cover...................................................................... 120
Removing the Front Bezel ....................................................................................... 121
Reinstalling the Front Bezel ..................................................................................... 121
Removing the Top Cover ......................................................................................... 121
Reinstalling the Top Cover....................................................................................... 123
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ................................................................... 123
Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ................................................................. 124
Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover ............................................................... 125
vii
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover ............................................................. 125
Removing the Memory Module Cover...................................................................... 125
Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover ................................................................... 126
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 127
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 127
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 127
Fan Array Housing ........................................................................................................... 128
Removing the Fan Array Housing ............................................................................ 128
Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing.......................................................................... 128
LCD Module ..................................................................................................................... 131
Removing the LCD Module...................................................................................... 131
Reinstalling the LCD Module.................................................................................... 131
Memory Modules.............................................................................................................. 132
Removing a Memory Module ................................................................................... 132
Reinstalling a Memory Module................................................................................. 133
Front Side Bus Terminator Module................................................................................... 135
Removing a Terminator Module............................................................................... 135
Reinstalling a Terminator Module ............................................................................ 135
Processor ......................................................................................................................... 137
Removing a Processor ............................................................................................ 137
Installing a Processor .............................................................................................. 137
DC to DC Converter VRM ................................................................................................ 138
Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM .................................................................... 138
Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM ...................................................................... 138
CPU Tray ......................................................................................................................... 140
Removing the CPU Tray .......................................................................................... 140
Reinstalling the CPU Tray........................................................................................ 140
Front Panel Board ............................................................................................................ 142
Removing the Front Panel Board............................................................................. 142
Reinstalling the Front Panel Board .......................................................................... 143
CPU Baseboard ............................................................................................................... 144
Removing the CPU Baseboard ................................................................................ 144
Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard.............................................................................. 144
Add-in Boards................................................................................................................... 146
Installing an Add-in Board........................................................................................ 146
Removing an Add-in Board...................................................................................... 149
I/O Riser Card .................................................................................................................. 150
Removing the I/O Riser Card................................................................................... 150
Reinstalling the I/O Riser Card ................................................................................ 150
I/O Tray ............................................................................................................................ 152
Removing the I/O Tray............................................................................................. 152
Reinstalling the I/O Tray .......................................................................................... 152
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board......................................................... 154
Removing the ICMB Board ...................................................................................... 154
Reinstalling the ICMB Board.................................................................................... 154
viii
Contents
PHP I/O Baseboard.......................................................................................................... 156
Removing the PHP I/O Baseboard .......................................................................... 156
Reinstalling the PHP I/O Baseboard ........................................................................ 156
MidPlane .......................................................................................................................... 158
Removing the Midplane ........................................................................................... 158
Reinstalling the Midplane......................................................................................... 158
AC Filter and Cable .......................................................................................................... 158
Removing the AC Filter and Cable........................................................................... 158
Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable ........................................................................ 159
Peripheral Bay.................................................................................................................. 159
Removing the Peripheral Bay .................................................................................. 159
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay ................................................................................ 159
Peripheral Bay Backplane ................................................................................................ 160
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane................................................................. 160
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane............................................................... 161
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board....................................................................................... 162
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board ....................................................... 162
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board..................................................... 162
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 165
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 165
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 165
Diskette Drive ................................................................................................................... 165
Removing the Diskette Drive ................................................................................... 166
Replacing the Diskette Drive.................................................................................... 166
CD-ROM Drive ................................................................................................................. 168
Removing the CD-ROM Drive.................................................................................. 168
Replacing the CD-ROM Drive .................................................................................. 170
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 171
Midplane Features............................................................................................................ 171
I2C Bus .................................................................................................................. 171
Detection Signals..................................................................................................... 172
5 V Quick Discharge ................................................................................................ 172
Midplane Connectors........................................................................................................ 173
Grand Connector ..................................................................................................... 174
Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector J2..................................................... 177
Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5..................................................... 178
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7................................................... 179
Power Supply Connectors J8, J9, & J10 .................................................................. 181
Peripheral Power Connector J11 ............................................................................. 181
ix
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 183
Peripheral Bay Backplane ................................................................................................ 183
SCSI ID Configurations............................................................................................ 184
Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors ............................................................................. 184
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 185
PHP Input/Output (I/O) Baseboard Features .................................................................... 185
32-bit PCI Expansion Slots ...................................................................................... 186
64-bit PCI Hot-plug Expansion Slots........................................................................ 186
ISA Expansion Slot .................................................................................................. 186
PCI Video Controller ................................................................................................ 187
Symbios 53C896 SCSI Controller............................................................................ 190
IDE Controller .......................................................................................................... 190
Server Management (SM) ....................................................................................... 190
I/O Riser Card.......................................................................................................... 192
PHP I/O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers ..................................................................... 193
Restoring CMOS to Default Values.......................................................................... 194
Clearing the Password............................................................................................. 195
Updating the BIOS................................................................................................... 195
Updating BMC, FPC, and HCS Firmware ................................................................ 198
Boot Sequence................................................................................................................. 199
PHP I/O Baseboard Layout .............................................................................................. 200
PHP I/O Baseboard Connectors....................................................................................... 201
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section ............................................................... 201
Expander Bus Connector: Power Section ............................................................... 204
32-bit PCI Connector ............................................................................................... 205
64-bit PCI Connector ............................................................................................... 206
ISA Connector ......................................................................................................... 207
Diskette Drive Port................................................................................................... 208
Wide/Fast 16-bit SCSI Port...................................................................................... 209
IDE Port .................................................................................................................. 210
I2C Feature Connector............................................................................................. 210
I2C Connector .......................................................................................................... 211
Front Panel Connector............................................................................................. 211
Legacy Connector.................................................................................................... 212
USB Port.................................................................................................................. 212
Keyboard and Mouse Ports ..................................................................................... 213
Serial Ports .............................................................................................................. 213
Parallel Port ............................................................................................................. 214
ICMB Connectors .................................................................................................... 214
VGA Video Port ....................................................................................................... 215
x
Contents
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 217
CPU Baseboard Features ................................................................................................ 217
Processors............................................................................................................... 217
Memory Interface..................................................................................................... 218
DC-to-DC Voltage Converters ................................................................................. 218
I/O Interface............................................................................................................. 219
Front Side Bus......................................................................................................... 219
Front Side Bus Terminator Module .......................................................................... 219
CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers........................................................................... 220
Changing a Jumper Setting ..................................................................................... 221
CPU Baseboard Layout.................................................................................................... 222
CPU Baseboard Connectors ............................................................................................ 223
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20:Rows A, B, and C .............................................. 223
I/O Connector .......................................................................................................... 226
Power Connectors ................................................................................................... 229
Front Panel Connector............................................................................................. 230
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 233
Module Features .............................................................................................................. 233
EDO DRAM Array ............................................................................................................ 234
Memory Module Layout .................................................................................................... 239
Installing DIMMs............................................................................................................... 240
Removing DIMMs............................................................................................................. 242
System Management Interface......................................................................................... 243
Memory Module Connector .............................................................................................. 244
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 249
AC Input Power ................................................................................................................ 249
Jumper JP1 Installing/Removing.............................................................................. 250
Power System .................................................................................................................. 251
Power Supply Input Voltages................................................................................... 252
Power Supply Output Voltages ................................................................................ 252
Server Current Usage ...................................................................................................... 253
Calculating Power Usage ................................................................................................. 254
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 257
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 257
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 257
Back-up Battery................................................................................................................ 258
Replacing the Back-up Battery ................................................................................ 259
xi
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 261
Resetting the Server......................................................................................................... 261
Initial Startup of the Server ............................................................................................... 262
Checklist .................................................................................................................. 262
Running New Application Software................................................................................... 263
Checklist .................................................................................................................. 263
After the Server Has Been Running Correctly .................................................................. 263
Checklist .................................................................................................................. 263
More Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................................... 264
Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing ............................................................ 264
Monitoring POST ..................................................................................................... 264
Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights....................................................... 265
Confirming Loading of the Operating System .......................................................... 265
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions ........................................................................ 265
Power Light Does Not Light ..................................................................................... 266
Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly .......................................................... 266
No Characters Appear on Screen ............................................................................ 267
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect ...................................................................... 267
Incorrect or no Beep Codes ..................................................................................... 267
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light ............................................................. 268
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light .......................................................... 268
Problems With Application Software ........................................................................ 269
Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down.................................................. 269
Error Codes and Messages.............................................................................................. 269
Port 80h Codes........................................................................................................ 270
POST Error Codes and Messages........................................................................... 273
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 277
Front Panel Board ............................................................................................................ 277
Fan Speed Control Voltage...................................................................................... 278
Speaker............................................................................................................................ 278
I2C Bus .................................................................................................................. 278
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 279
Features ........................................................................................................................... 279
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors .............................................................................. 279
Blind Mate Connector J1 .................................................................................................. 280
Power Connector J2......................................................................................................... 281
Diskette Connector J3 ...................................................................................................... 281
IDE Connector J4 ............................................................................................................. 282
Wide SCSI Connector J5.................................................................................................. 283
xii
Contents
A Regulatory Specifications
Declaration of Compliance ............................................................................................... 285
Safety Compliance ........................................................................................................... 285
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................................... 285
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice (USA) ............................................................ 286
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices (International) .............................................. 286
B Equipment Log
Equipment Log ................................................................................................................. 287
C Warnings
WARNING: English (US) ................................................................................................. 290
AVERTISSEMENT: Français........................................................................................... 292
WARNUNG: Deutsch ...................................................................................................... 294
AVVERTENZA: Italiano ................................................................................................... 296
ADVERTENCIAS: Español.............................................................................................. 298
Index
Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.
7-5.
7-6.
9-1.
High-performance Server........................................................................................ 17
Chassis, Board Set ................................................................................................. 21
Chassis, Front View ................................................................................................ 22
Chassis, Rear View................................................................................................. 23
Server Controls and Indicators................................................................................ 25
Server I/O Connections........................................................................................... 32
Server Power and Reset Switches.......................................................................... 34
CD-ROM Drive........................................................................................................ 36
Boot Menu .............................................................................................................. 38
CD-ROM Boot Menu............................................................................................... 38
System Setup Utility Main Window.......................................................................... 61
RCA Window .......................................................................................................... 62
Define ISA Window ................................................................................................. 63
Configuration Window............................................................................................. 65
System Resource Usage Window........................................................................... 66
Multiboot Main Window........................................................................................... 67
Password Main Window.......................................................................................... 69
System Event Log Main Window ............................................................................ 71
SDR Manager Main Window................................................................................... 72
FRU Manager Main Window ................................................................................... 74
EMP Console in Command State ........................................................................... 78
EMP Console in Redirect State............................................................................... 79
Connect Dialog ....................................................................................................... 84
Power On/Off Dialog ............................................................................................... 85
Reset Dialog ........................................................................................................... 86
Phonebook Dialog................................................................................................... 87
Removing/Hot-swapping a Fan............................................................................... 99
xiii
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
10-1.
10-2.
10-3.
10-4.
11-1.
12-1.
12-2.
12-3.
12-4.
12-5.
12-6.
13-1.
13-2.
13-3.
13-4.
13-5.
13-6.
13-7.
13-8.
13-9.
13-10.
13-11.
13-12.
13-13.
13-14.
13-15.
13-16.
13-17.
13-18.
13-19.
13-20.
14-1.
14-2.
14-3.
15-1.
16-1.
17-1.
17-2.
17-3.
18-1.
18-2.
19-1.
19-2.
19-3.
19-4.
19-5.
19-6.
19-7.
xiv
Hard Disk Drive and Carrier .................................................................................. 103
Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly.................................................................. 103
Installing a Hard Disk Drive................................................................................... 105
Hot-swap SCSI Drive Indicators............................................................................ 107
Removing a Power Supply.................................................................................... 111
Server Covers....................................................................................................... 120
Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel.................................................................. 121
Top Cover ............................................................................................................. 122
PCI Regular Slot Cover......................................................................................... 123
PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ....................................................................................... 124
Memory Module Cover.......................................................................................... 126
Fan Removal ........................................................................................................ 129
Fan Array Housing ................................................................................................ 130
LCD Module.......................................................................................................... 132
Memory Module .................................................................................................... 134
Removing a Holddown.......................................................................................... 136
DC to DC Converter VRM ..................................................................................... 139
CPU Tray.............................................................................................................. 141
CPU Tray Support Rail ......................................................................................... 142
Front Panel Board................................................................................................. 143
CPU Baseboard.................................................................................................... 145
PHP I/O Baseboard Expansion Slots .................................................................... 147
Expansion Slot Cover ........................................................................................... 147
Installing an Add-in Board ..................................................................................... 148
I/O Riser Card....................................................................................................... 151
I/O Tray................................................................................................................. 153
ICMB Board .......................................................................................................... 155
PHP I/O Baseboard .............................................................................................. 157
Peripheral Bay ...................................................................................................... 160
Peripheral Bay Backplane..................................................................................... 161
Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board .......................................................................... 163
Diskette Drive ....................................................................................................... 167
CD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................... 169
Snap-in Plastic Slide Rails .................................................................................... 170
Midplane ............................................................................................................... 173
Peripheral Bay Backplane..................................................................................... 184
I/O Riser Card....................................................................................................... 192
J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block......................................................................... 193
PHP I/O Baseboard Layout................................................................................... 200
J31 Jumper Block ................................................................................................. 220
CPU Baseboard Layout ........................................................................................ 222
4:1 Interleave With Four DIMMs ........................................................................... 236
4:1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs........................................................................... 237
4:1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs............................................................................... 238
Memory Module Layout ........................................................................................ 239
DIMM Orientation.................................................................................................. 240
Properly Seated DIMM.......................................................................................... 241
Removing DIMMs ................................................................................................. 242
Contents
20-1. Jumper JP1 .......................................................................................................... 250
21-1. Lithium Back-up Battery........................................................................................ 260
24-1. Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors .................................................................. 279
Tables
7-1.
7-2.
17-1.
18-1.
18-2.
19-1.
20-1.
20-2.
20-3.
20-4.
20-5.
23-1.
EMP Console Access Modes (Server configured for console redirection)............... 79
EMP Console Access Modes (Server not configured for console redirection)......... 80
onfiguration Jumpers (J2C1)................................................................................. 194
J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management ................................................. 220
J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios.................................................................................. 221
Memory Module DIMM Support ............................................................................ 234
Power Supply AC Input Ratings............................................................................ 252
Power Supply Output Ratings ............................................................................... 252
Server Board Set Voltages and Currents .............................................................. 253
Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage......................................................... 254
Total Combined Power Used by Your Server........................................................ 255
Fan Speed Control................................................................................................ 278
xv
Part I: User’s Guide
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running
4 Setup Utility: When to Run
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run
6 SCSI Configuration Utility
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping
15
White text
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
The modular scaleable architecture of your high-performance rack server supports symmetrical
multiprocessing (SMP) and a variety of operating systems. The server comes with Peripheral
Component Interconnect (PCI) and Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) buses. The server board
set consists of eight individual boards.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CPU baseboard
Two memory modules
Front side bus terminator module
PCI hot-plug (PHP) I/O baseboard
I/O riser card
Front panel board
Midplane
LVDS (low-voltage differential signal) SCSI hot-swap peripheral bay backplane
The CPU baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis, and the PHP I/O
baseboard is mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis. The baseboards plug into
connectors on the midplane mounted between them. The midplane interconnects the baseboards
with the memory modules and power supplies. The front panel board is mounted in front of the
CPU baseboard in the same plane. It provides the user interface, server management, cooling
system control, and power control.
OM07311
Figure 1-1. High-performance Server
17
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
The easy-to-integrate server can easily accommodate the needs of a variety of high performance
applications—for example, network servers, multiuser systems, and large database operations. As
your application requirements increase, you can upgrade your server with:
•
•
•
•
More powerful processors
Additional memory
Other peripheral devices
Add-in I/O boards
Server Features
Feature
Comment
Power system with redundancy
The 750 watt, 220 VAC autoranging power supplies include integrated
fans for cooling. In a rack server with three supplies (2 + 1), the third
one is redundant. The supplies can be replaced—hot-swapped—
without turning the server power off. The server requires a minimum of
two power supplies. LEDs on the back of the power supply indicate
power on, failure, and predictive failure.
Server chassis
The electrogalvanized metal used in manufacturing the server chassis
minimizes electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency
interference (RFI).
3.5-inch diskette drive in the 3.5-inch bay.
5.25-inch IDE CD-ROM drive in the 5.25-inch half-height bay.
Two 3.5-inch wide by 1.0-inch or 1.6-inch hot-swappable LVDS hard
disk drives mounted side-by-side in the 3.5-inch hot-docking bays. The
hot-docking bays allow hot-swapping of hard disk drives without
shutting down the server.
Three power supply bays populated with either two or three power
supplies.
Ten I/O expansion slot covers.
The plastic front bezel provides airflow and easy access to drives in the
hot-docking bays. The removable top covers provide proper airflow
and easy access to components inside the server. A padlock (not
supplied) on the back of the chassis secures the covers to prevent
unauthorized entry into the server—only technically qualified personnel
should remove the server covers.
Cooling system with redundancy
Six fans (5 + 1) cool and circulate air through the server. The sixth fan
is redundant. The fans can be replaced—hot-swapped—without
turning the server power off. An LED mounted next to each fan
guarantees positive identification of the failed fan.
Integrated power supply fans—two or three—cool and circulate air
through the power supplies and the bottom of the chassis.
continued
18
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
Server Features (continued)
Feature
Comment
Front panel board
The front panel board provides the user interface to the server. The
board allows other servers to communicate with this server, even while
power is down, via an Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB).
Push-button switches control power-up, reset, and nonmaskable
interrupt (NMI) functions.
LEDs indicate power on, power supply failure, hard drive failure, or a
fan or other server cooling failure.
An LCD panel provides information about boot status, available number
of processors, and other server management information.
Server management
Interintegrated circuit bus (I2C) for diagnostic and intrachassis
communication. ICMB for interchassis platform management
communications.
Real-time clock/calendar (RTC).
Front panel controls and indicators (LEDs).
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), Power-on Self Test (POST), and
Setup Utility stored in a flash memory device.
System Setup Utility (SSU).
SCSI Configuration Utility.
Emergency Management Port (EMP) Utility.
Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) Load
Utility.
CPU baseboard
The baseboard supports up to four Pentium® II Xeon™ processors,
each processor is packaged in a Single Edge Contact (S.E.C.)
cartridge; the baseboard supports two memory modules.
Pentium II Xeon processor
packaged in an S.E.C. cartridge
The cartridge includes the processor core and L2 cache components.
Memory module
Each memory module supports up to 4 GB of ECC memory using
sixteen 72-bit dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). (The CPU
baseboard requires two memory modules, one must contain DIMMS.)
continued
19
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server Features (continued)
Feature
Comment
PHP I/O baseboard
One 16-bit ISA expansion slot shares a common chassis I/O expansion
slot with a 32-bit PCI slot (you can use the shared slot for either ISA or
PCI but not both).
Six 32-bit PCI expansion slots; one of them shares a common chassis
I/O expansion slot with the ISA slot (you can use the shared slot for
either PCI or ISA but not both).
Four 64-bit PCI hot-plug expansion slots.
Integrated Cirrus Logic GD5446 VisualMedia† PCI super video graphics
array (SVGA) controller with 2 MB of video memory.
The Symbios† 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller supports two LVDS
channels. One channel controls internal devices such as CD-ROMs,
tape, and DVDs drives, in addition to the two hard drives in the
peripheral bay. The other channel provides a connection to external
devices.
The diskette controller supports one drive.
The PCI-enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) interface
supports one IDE bus.
PS/2†-compatible keyboard/mouse controller.
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports.
I/O riser card
This card contains all legacy I/O connections; it plugs into a card edge
connector on the PHP I/O baseboard.
PS/2-compatible keyboard and mouse ports (these are
interchangeable).
PS/2-compatible parallel port.
Analog VGA, 15-pin video port.
Two PS/2-compatible, 9-pin serial ports.
Midplane
20
The midplane
•
electrically connects the PHP I/O, memory, power supplies and
CPU baseboard
•
distributes DC power to the PHP I/O and CPU baseboards,
peripheral bay backplane, cooling fans, and the front panel board
•
distributes the power load of the server among two or three
750 watt autoranging power supplies
Front side bus (FSB) terminator
module
This module plugs into any unpopulated slot 2 connector on the CPU
baseboard. This module terminates the FSB GTL+ signals of the slot 2
connector when a processor S.E.C. cartridge is not installed in it.
Peripheral bay backplane
This backplane supports hot-swapping of SCA type SCSI drives,
mounted in carriers, in and out of the hot-docking bays.
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
Chassis
Figures 1-2 and 1-3 show the major components of the server.
C
B
A
D
E
OM07330
Figure 1-2. Chassis, Board Set
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Front panel board
CPU baseboard and processors
PHP I/O baseboard
Midplane
Memory modules
21
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
A
B
C
OM07349
Figure 1-3. Chassis, Front View
A.
B.
C.
22
3.5-inch diskette drive (3.5-inch bay)
CD-ROM drive (5.25-inch bay)
Hot-swap bays
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
B CD
A
E
F
G
H
I
N
M
J
L
K
OM07300
Figure 1-4. Chassis, Rear View
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
PCI and ISA add-in board expansion slots
External LVDS connector
PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin
PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin
PS/2-compatible serial ports 0 and 1, 9-pin RS-232 connector
Super VGA compatible, 15-pin video connector
PS/2-compatible parallel port (LPT), 25-pin bidirectional subminiature D connector
USB ports 0 and 1, 4-pin connector
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) connectors port 1 and 2
Power Supplies
Failure LED (yellow)
Predictive failure LED (yellow) for power supply fan
Power LED (green)
AC input power connector
23
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Controls and Indicators
Item
Feature
Description
Front Panel
A
Power switch
When pressed, it turns on or off the DC power inside the server.
B
Reset switch
When pressed, it resets the server and causes the power-on self test
(POST) to run.
C
NMI switch
When pressed, it causes a nonmaskable interrupt. This switch is
recessed behind the front panel to prevent inadvertent activation. It
must be pressed with a narrow non-conductive tool (not supplied).
D
Power LED (green)
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of DC power in the
server. It goes out when the power is turned off or the power source
is disrupted.
E
Power fault LED (yellow)
When lit continuously, it indicates a power supply failure.
F
Cooling fault LED (yellow)
When lit, it indicates a fan failure has been detected in the server.
G
Drive fault LED (yellow)
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or
more hard disk drives in the hot-docking bay. When flashing, it
indicates drive reset in progress.
H
Front panel LCD
It displays information about processor type and failure codes.
I
SCSI drive hot-docking
bays
Two SCSI hot docking bays for 3.5-inch x 1.0 inch or 1.6-inch SCSI
hard drives.
Status LEDs for SCSI Drives in Hot-docking Bays
J
Drive fault LED (yellow)
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or
more hard disk drives in the hot-docking bay. When flashing, it
indicates drive reset in progress.
K
Drive activity LED (green)
When flashing, it indicates drive activity.
L
Drive power LED (green)
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of the drive and power
on the drive.
CD-ROM Drive
M
Open/close button
When pressed, it opens or closes the CD tray.
N
Activity LED
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.
O
Volume control
It adjusts the volume of headphones or speakers.
P
Headphone jack
It provides a connection for headphones or speakers.
3.5-inch Floppy (Diskette) Drive
24
Q
Activity LED
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.
R
Ejector button
When pressed, it ejects the diskette.
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
A
B
C
D E F G
H
R
Q
P O
N M
I
LKJ
OM07344
Figure 1-5. Server Controls and Indicators
25
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server Security
There are several ways to prevent unauthorized entry or use of the server.
Security with the Setup utility:
•
•
Set server administrative and user passwords.
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel
controls.
Security with the System Setup Utility (SSU):
•
•
•
•
•
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the
keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period—1 to 128 minutes.
Set an administrative password.
Set a user password.
Activate the secure mode hot-key.
Disable writing to the diskette drive.
Password Protection
BIOS passwords prevent unauthorized tampering with the server. If you set the user password, but
not the administrative password, the BIOS requires you to enter the user password before you can
boot the server or run the SSU. If you set both passwords, entering either password lets you boot
the server or enable the keyboard and mouse. Only the administrative password lets you change
the server configuration with the flash-resident Setup utility.
Secure Boot Mode
The secure boot mode allows the server to boot and run the operating system (OS). However, you
cannot use either the keyboard or the mouse until you enter the user password.
You can use Setup to put the server in the secure boot mode. If the BIOS detects a disk in the
CD-ROM drive or a diskette in floppy drive A at boot time, it prompts you for a password. When
you enter the password, the server boots from the disk in the CD-ROM drive or the diskette in
drive A. Entering a password also disables the secure mode.
If there is no disk in the CD-ROM drive or diskette in drive A, the server boots from drive C. It
automatically goes into secure mode. All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time.
If you set a hot-key combination, you can secure the server immediately.
Boot Sequence Control
The BIOS security features determine the boot devices and the boot sequence. They also control
disabling writes to the diskette drive in secure mode. You can use the SSU to select each boot
device. The default boot sequence is diskette, hard disk, CD-ROM, and Network.
26
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server
Boot Without Keyboard
The server can boot with or without a keyboard. Before it boots, the BIOS displays a message
about the keyboard stating whether or not it detects one. During POST, the BIOS automatically
detects and tests the keyboard if it is present.
Locked Power and Reset Switches
The power and reset push-button switches on the front panel are locked when the server is in the
secure mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.
Diskette Write Protect
If Diskette Write Protect is enabled in Setup, it write-protects the diskette drive only while the
server is in the secure mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.
Video Blanking
If Video Blanking is enabled in Setup, the video display will be off when the server is in the secure
mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.
Emergency Management Port (EMP)
The Emergency Management Port (EMP) is a feature of Server Management. EMP lets the Front
Panel Controller (FPC) communicate with a EMP console via the serial port even if the server
power is off. To enable this feature in the flash-resident Setup, an administrator must enter a
unique EMP password. If the administrator enters a new EMP password or clears an old one, the
BIOS sends the appropriate command via the I2C bus interface to the FPC. If the administrator
wants to change the password from within Setup again, the new password must be entered twice.
If the administrator sets the Password Clear jumper to the Clear position, the BIOS clears the
administrator and user passwords. It also attempts to clear the EMP password. If the FPC is not
present or is not functioning properly, the BIOS times out and continues.
27
Blank page
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
This chapter tells how to:
•
•
•
•
•
Select a site
Connect input and output devices
Turn on the server and create installation diskettes from the Server System Configuration
Software CD
Read and print a copy of this manual
Exit to DOS
WARNING
The minimum server configuration weighs about 51.4 kg (113 lbs), and
the maximum one weighs close to 60 kg (132 lbs). To avoid personal
injury, have someone help you move the server. Do not attempt to lift
or move the server by holding the handles on the power supply.
Selecting a Site
The server operates reliably within the specified environmental limits (see page 30). The chosen
site must be close to a grounded power outlet applicable for the electrical code of that region. The
minimum available power requirements are described in Chapter 20, “Power System:
Description/Calculating Power Usage”.
CAUTION
Ensure that the power service connection is through a properly grounded
outlet.
The site must also be:
•
•
•
•
•
Clean and dust-free
Well ventilated and away from sources of heat
Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields and electrical noise caused by electrical devices
such as air conditioners, large fans, large electric motors, radio and TV transmitters, and high
frequency security devices
Spacious enough to provide sufficient room behind and around the server so that you can
remove AC power from it by unplugging the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet
Away from sources of vibration or physical shock
29
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Physical Specifications
Height
31.12 cm (12.25 inches)
Width
44.45 cm (17.5 inches)
Depth
71.12 cm (28.0 inches)
Weight
51.4 kg (113 lbs) minimum configuration; 60 kg (132 lbs) maximum configuration
Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Nonoperating
Operating
–40° to 70 °C (–40° to 158 °F)
5° to 40 °C (41° to 104 °F); with maximum derated 1°C for every 1000 ft
(305 m) above 1524 m (5000 ft).
Humidity
Operating wet bulb
Nonoperating
Operating
Not to exceed 37.6 °C (100.4 °F) without peripherals
95% noncondensing at 55 °C (131 °F)
85% noncondensing at 40 °C (104 °F)
Nonoperating
Operating
30 g trapezoidal, 11 msec
2.0 g, 11 msec, 1/2 sine
Shock
Altitude
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10000 ft) Maximum ambient temperature is linearly
derated between 1524 m (5000 ft) and 3048 m (10000 ft) by 1 °C per
305 m (1000 ft)
Acoustic
Sound pressure
Sound power
30
<=55dbA at ambient temperatures < 28 °C measured at bystander
positions in operating mode.
<= 6.5 BA at ambient temperatures < 28 °C in operating mode.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Tested to 20 kilovolts (kV), no component damage. (CD-ROM drive tested
to 15 kV, manufacturer’s specification.)
AC Input Power
100-120 V~
200-240 V~
Two ( or three) power supplies, fully loaded
100-120 V~, 6.0 A, 50/60 Hz
200-240 V~, 4.0 A, 50/60 Hz
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
After Unpacking the Server
Inspect the shipping box for evidence of mishandling during transit. If the shipping box is
damaged, photograph it for reference. After removing the contents, keep the damaged box and the
packing materials. If the contents appear damaged, file a damage claim with the carrier
immediately.
Save the shipping boxes and packing materials to repackage the server in the event you decide to
move it to another site.
Connecting Peripheral Devices
CAUTION
Before connecting peripheral devices to the server, verify that the power
cord is unplugged from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet. Otherwise,
equipment damage can result.
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server
covers and to access any of the components inside the server.
If your server normally operates without a video monitor and keyboard—for example, as a
network server—you must install them to configure it. You may remove them after running the
SSU. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run” for information about running this
utility.
Connect your keyboard, mouse, monitor, and other peripheral devices after a qualified service
technician installs internal options. See Figure 2-1.
Keyboard and Mouse
Connect the signal cable of a PS/2-compatible keyboard or mouse to either one
of the 6-pin miniature Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) connectors on the server
back panel. The BIOS detects and initializes the keyboard and mouse ports
accordingly. Each port is overcurrent protected by a 1-ampere positive
temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor.
Monitor
Connect the signal cable of the video monitor to the 15-pin connector of the
Super VGA port on the back panel.
Other Devices
Connect other external peripheral devices by following the manufacturer’s
documentation. The back panel also provides two serial ports, a parallel port,
and two USB ports. The back of the chassis provides two Intelligent Chassis
Management Bus (ICMB) ports.
31
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
A
B
C
D
I
F
E
H
G
OM07335
Figure 2-1. Server I/O Connections
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
32
PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin connector
PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin connector
PS/2-compatible serial port 2 (COM2), 9-pin RS-232 connector
PS/2-compatible serial port 1 (COM1), 9-pin RS-232 connector
Super VGA compatible, 15-pin video connector
PS/2-compatible parallel port (LPT), 25-pin bidirectional subminiature D connector
USB ports 0 and 1, 4-pin connectors
External LVDS SCSI connector
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) port 1 and 2, SEMCONN† 6-pin
connector
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
Obtaining a Power Cord Set
WARNING
Do not attempt to modify or use an AC power cord that is not the exact
type required.
Because a power cord is not supplied for the server, you must obtain a power cord that meets the
following criteria:

For North America the cord must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 14/3, 75 °C type SJT with
NEMA 6-15P attachment plug and IEC 320, C19 outlet.

For outside North America the cord must be flexible VDE certified or <HAR> (harmonized)
2
rated 250 V, 0.75 mm minimum conductor size with IEC 320, C19 outlet and rated for no less
than the product ratings. The attachment plug shall be a three conductor grounding type, rated
125% of the total input current rating of the product and must be for the configuration in the
specific region or country. The attachment plug must bear at least an accepted safety agency
certification mark for the specific region or country.

The cord must be no longer than 4.5 meters (14.76 ft).
Turning on Your Server
WARNING
The push-button on/off power switch on the front panel of the server
does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC power from the server,
you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.
1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video monitor, keyboard, and mouse (optional) have
been connected.
2. Remove drive protection cards (if present) from the removable media drives.
3. Turn on your video monitor.
4. Plug the female end of the power cord into the AC inlet filter receptacle on the back of the
chassis.
5. Plug the male end of the power cord into a properly grounded power outlet. See page 29 for
power outlet requirements.
6. If the server does not come on when you plug the power cord into the power outlet, press the
power switch on the front panel.
7. Verify that the power-on light on the front panel is lit. After a few seconds the power-on self
test (POST) begins. See “Power-on Self Test” on page 35.
33
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
A
B
C
D E F G
H
OM07334
Figure 2-2. Server Power and Reset Switches
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
34
Power switch
Reset switch
NMI switch
Power LED (green)
Power fault LED (yellow)
Cooling fault LED (yellow)
Drive fault (yellow)
Front panel LCD
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
Power-on Self Test
Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and the power-on self
test (POST) starts running. POST checks the I/O system board, processor system board, keyboard,
and most installed peripheral devices.
During the memory test, POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test.
Depending on the amount of memory installed on each memory board, the test may take several
minutes.
These screen prompts and messages appear after the memory test:
Mouse initialized....
Keboard detected
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
Do NOT press <F2>. The above message remains for about a second, and POST continues. The
server beeps once, and this message appears:
Operating system not found
Go to “Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD” on page 36.
35
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD
CAUTION
The Server Configuration Software CD contains only a limited operating
system. This limited operating system provides enough function to let you
boot from the CD and copy and use the utility and manual files from the CD.
But this limited OS is NOT intended to be copied onto diskettes or onto your
hard disk as a full-function OS that supports networking or Windows†. To
run your server and applications, you must buy the OS of your choice and
install it on the server.
See Figure 2-3.
1. Open the CD tray by pressing the open/close button on the front panel of the CD-ROM drive—
the tray will slide out of the drive.
2. Open the CD case. Press down on the center hub of the case with your finger to release the
hub tension on the CD.
CAUTION
Handle the CD only by the inner and outer edges. Do not touch the data side
of the CD—the side without the label.
3. Gently grasp the center hole and outer edge of the CD, remove it from the case, and place it
label-side up in the tray.
4. Press the open/close button or gently push on the tray—it will automatically slide into the
drive.
A
B
OM06774
Figure 2-3. CD-ROM Drive
A.
B.
Open/close push-button switch
CD tray
5. Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server.
6. When POST completes, the server beeps once, boots from the CD, installs a mouse driver, and
displays the CD-ROM menu. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu bar and to view
the tasks in the pop-up menus.
36
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
✏
NOTE
If you do not see the CD-ROM menu but see the following message instead,
Operating system not found
you need to change the “Boot Device Priority” to the CD-ROM. See
“Server Won’t Boot From the CD” on page 38 for instructions.
Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes
When you copy software from the CD onto diskettes, device drivers suitable for several different
operating systems are copied onto the diskettes. However, your operating system will read only
those drivers it can recognize, so you cannot usually check the directory of a diskette that is not
formatted for your operating system. Instead, you may see a message to the effect, “disk not
formatted, do you want to format it now?” Don’t worry; the drivers for YOUR operating system
should be present on the diskette and available for you to load on the system.
1. Before starting, make sure that you have on hand several blank high-density diskettes.
2. From the CD-ROM menu bar, select Create Diskettes and press <Enter>.
3. Follow the prompts to copy the software onto the diskettes.
4. When finished, select Quit to DOS (on the CD-ROM menu bar), and press <Enter>.
5. Remove the CD from the drive.
Installing Video Drivers
After configuring the server, you can install various video drivers to take full advantage of the
enhanced features provided by the onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator.
The server may not operate properly without these drivers installed.
After copying the drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes, read the
README.TXT file on the Display Drivers and DOS Utilities diskette. The .TXT file contains the
most current information about which video drivers you need to install on your server. Follow the
installation instructions in the README.TXT file.
Follow these steps to install these drivers::
1. Fully configure your server. (This can include adding application software, an ISA add-in
board, PCI add-in boards, and the like.)
2. Insert disk 1 of the video drivers and utilities for MS-DOS† and Windows into drive A.
3. At the DOS command prompt, type A:install and press <Enter>.
4. Follow the onscreen directions to install the video drivers.
Installing SCSI Drivers
After copying the SCSI drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes, follow the
instructions in the README.TXT file on the first diskette to install the drivers.
37
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server Won’t Boot From the CD
It is possible that your server was shipped with the diskette drive or another device set as the first
boot device. If so, the server will try to boot from a diskette or other device rather than from the
CD we have provided. By pressing <Esc> during POST, you can override the boot sequence
specified in Setup by selecting a different primary boot device. This override is valid only for that
specific boot. Subsequent boots revert back to the sequence specified in Setup. If the chosen
device fails to load the operating system, the BIOS reverts to the previous boot sequence. The
<Esc> hot key is valid while the “Press <F2> key to enter Setup” message is displayed on the
screen. At the end of POST, if the <Esc> key was pressed, a pop-up boot menu is displayed. It
allows you to change the boot sequence, or to enter Setup and permanently change the sequence.
Follow these steps to install these drivers:
1. Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server—the CD can be in the drive or
not.
2. When POST displays this message:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
3. Press <Esc> and wait for the following boot menu to display:
OM08360
Figure 2-4. Boot Menu
4. From the boot menu, select the CD-ROM drive, and press <Enter>.
5. When you see the following pop-up menu, press <Enter> to boot from the CD.
OM08361
Figure 2-5. CD-ROM Boot Menu
38
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server
The server should now boot from the CD, displaying a menu bar that includes creating diskettes,
diagnostics, reading/printing the manual, and quitting to DOS.
CAUTION
If the server does not operate as described in this chapter, contact a qualified
service technician.
39
This page should be blank
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running
Power-on Self Test (POST)
WARNING
The push-button on/off power switch on the front panel of the server
does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC power from the server,
you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.
Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and POST starts
running. It checks the PHP I/O baseboard, CPU baseboard, keyboard, and most installed
peripheral devices. During the memory test, POST displays the amount of memory that it is able
to access and test. Depending on the amount of memory installed on the memory module, it may
take several minutes to complete the memory test.
Turn on your video monitor and server. After a few seconds the power-on self test (POST) begins.
You can enter Setup when POST displays this message:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
If you press <F2>, follow the instructions on the monitor when Setup appears.
✏
NOTE
Because POST must complete test and initialization functions after pressing
<F2>, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup.
If you do not press <F2>, POST continues.
During boot, the server recognizes and displays the BIOS banner for the onboard Sl53C896 SCSI
host adapter on the PHP I/O baseboard.
When the BIOS banner for the SCSI host adapter appears, you can run the included SCSI
configuration utility by pressing <Ctrl+C> when this message appears:
Press <Ctrl><C> To Enter Configuration Utility!
If you have installed SCSI devices in the server, press <Ctrl+C>. When the utility appears, follow
the instructions on the monitor to configure the host adapter. See Chapter 6, “SCSI Configuration
Utility,” for instructions.
41
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
If POST detects an error, it displays the error code, the server beeps once, and this message
appears:
Press <F1> to Resume, <F2> for Setup
To resume, press <F1>. However, if a drive with bootable media is not detected, the server beeps
once, and this message appears:
Operating System not found
To enter Setup, Press <F2>. When the Setup utility appears, follow the instructions on the
monitor.
If POST did not detect an error and you choose not to run the SCSI Configuration Utility, POST
continues, the server beeps once, and this message appears:
Operating System not found
See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” for instructions on creating software
installation diskettes.
If the server halts before POST completes running, it emits a beep code indicating a fatal system
error that requires immediate attention. If POST can display a message on the video monitor, it
causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears.
Note the screen display and write down the beep code you hear; this information is useful for your
service representative. For a listing of beep codes and error messages that POST can generate, see
Chapter 22, "Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages."
42
4 Setup Utility: When to Run
The flash-resident BIOS Setup utility is used to configure PHP I/O baseboard resources. It is
stored in both flash memory (NVRAM) and the battery-backed memory of the real-time clock
(RTC) on the PHP I/O baseboard.
When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility
The BIOS Setup is a flash-based configuration utility that is used to configure onboard resources
and to set user-selectable options such as boot device ordering, keyboard autorepeat, and security.
Use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state, and then use the SSU and other utilities to
further configure the server.
Setup lets you change the server configuration defaults. It does not allow you to enter or change
information about PCI or ISA add-in boards; you must use the SSU instead. Setup stores the
configuration values in flash memory; they take effect when you boot the server. POST checks
these values against the actual hardware configuration; if they do not agree, POST generates an
error message. You must then run Setup to specify the correct configuration.
You can run Setup with or without an operating system being present.
Because values entered using Setup are overwritten when you run the SSU, you should run Setup
only under the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
If the diskette drive is disabled.
If the server has a diskette drive that is disabled or improperly configured, use Setup to
configure the server into a bootable state, and then use the SSU and other utilities to further
configure the server. In Setup, you can enable the drive so you can use the SSU. If necessary,
you can disable the diskette drive again after exiting the SSU.
If the server does not have a diskette drive, or it is disabled, use Setup to configure the server.
If you have installed only an ISA add-in board in your server.
If the server has a properly configured, enabled diskette drive, use the SSU to configure the server.
Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup.
Running the Setup Utility
You can enter Setup under several conditions:
•
•
•
•
when you turn on the server
when you reboot the server by pressing the push-button reset switch on the front panel
when you reboot the server by pressing <Ctrl+Alt+Del> while at the DOS operating system
prompt
when you turn on or reset your server after an orderly shutdown of an operating system other
than DOS
43
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and, after a few seconds, displays this
message:
Press <F2> to enter Setup
After pressing F2, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests and
initialization functions. When the F2 prompt disappears, pressing F2 will have no effect. When
Setup is entered, the Main Menu options page is displayed.
Use the following keys to navigate through the menus and submenus.
Press
To
F1
Get help about an item
ESC
Go back to a previous item
↑
Select the previous value in a menu option list
↓
Select the next value in a menu option list
←→
Select a major menu
-
Change the value of the current menu item to the previous value
+
Change the value of the current menu item to the next value
Enter
Activate submenus, select feature options, and change feature values
F9
Display the following message:
Setup Confirmation
Load default configuration now?
[Yes]
[No]
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all Setup fields return to their
default values. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to the configuration it had
before you pressed <F9>, without affecting any existing field values.
F10
Display the following message:
Setup Confirmation
Save configuration changes and exit now?
[Yes]
[No]
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all current Setup values are saved,
and the system is reset. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to the
configuration it had before you pressed <F10>, without affecting any existing values.
44
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Main Menu
Default values are in bold typeface, and auto-configured values are shaded.
Feature
Option
Description
System Time
HH:MM:SS
Set the System Time. To select a field, press <Tab>,
<Shift + Tab>, or <Enter>. Then type in a new value. If
you replace the battery, the default time is 00:00. (This is
a 24-hour clock.)
System Date
MM/DD/YYYY
Set the System Date. To select a field, press <Tab>,
<Shift + Tab>, or <Enter>. Then type in a new value. If
you replace the battery, the default date is Jan 1990.
Legacy Diskette A:
Disabled
360 KB, 5 ¼”
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”
720 KB, 3 ½”
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”
2.88 MB, 3 ½”
Select the diskette type for drive A:. (The 1.25 MB,
3.5-inch refers to a 1024 byte/sector Japanese media
format. To support the 1.25 MB, 3.5-inch requires a
3.5-inch 3-mode diskette drive.)
Legacy Diskette B:
Disabled
360 KB, 5 ¼”
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”
720 KB, 3 ½”
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”
2.88 MB, 3 ½”
Select the diskette type for drive B: (The size 1.25 MB,
3.5-inch refers to a 1024 byte/sector Japanese media
format. To support the 1.25 MB, 3.5-inch requires a
3.5-inch 3-mode diskette drive.)
Primary Master
CD-ROM
Press <Enter> for options.
Autotype Fixed Disk:
Press <Enter>
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.
Type:
User
Auto
1-39
CD-ROM
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk
drive installed at this connection.
ATAPI Removable
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive
installed here.
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.
Multi-sector Transfers:
Disabled
LBA Mode Control
Disabled
32-bit I/O:
Disabled
Enabled
Transfer Mode
Standard
Ultra DMA Mode:
Disabled
Primary Slave
None
Press <Enter> for options.
Autotype Fixed Disk:
Press <Enter>
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.
continued
45
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Main Menu (continued)
Feature
Option
Description
Type:
User
Auto
1-39
CD-ROM
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk
drive installed at this connection.
ATAPI Removable
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive
installed here.
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.
32-bit I/O:
Disabled
Enabled
Ultra DMA Mode:
Disabled
Secondary Master
None
Press <Enter> for options.
Autotype Fixed Disk:
Press <Enter>
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.
Type:
User
Auto
1-39
CD-ROM
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk
drive installed at this connection.
ATAPI Removable
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive
installed here.
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.
32-bit I/O:
Disabled
Enabled
Ultra DMA Mode:
Disabled
Secondary Slave
None
Press <Enter> for options.
Autotype Fixed Disk:
Press <Enter>
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.
Type:
User
Auto
1-39
CD-ROM
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk
drive installed at this connection.
ATAPI Removable
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive
installed here.
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.
32-bit I/O:
Disabled
Enabled
Ultra DMA Mode:
Disabled
Processor Information
Press <Enter>
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.
Displays information about all processors. You cannot
modify any items in this menu. Consult your system
administrator if an item requires changing.
Processor 1
Stepping ID 2.
Processor 1
L2 cache size [512 KB].
Processor 2
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.
continued
46
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Main Menu (continued)
Feature
Option
Description
Processor 3
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.
Processor 4
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.
Keyboard Features
Press <Enter> for options.
Numlock:
Auto
On
Off
Select power-on state for numlock.
Key Click:
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled produces the key click.
Keyboard auto-repeat
rate:
30/sec
26.7/sec
21.8/sec
18.5/sec
13.3/sec
10/sec
6/sec
2/sec
Select key repeat rate.
Keyboard auto-repeat
delay:
1/4 sec
1/2 sec
3/4 sec
1 sec
Select delay before key repeat.
Language
English (US)
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Select the display language for the BIOS.
Advanced Menu
Setup Warning
Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction.
Feature
Option
Description
Plug & Play O/S:
No
Yes
Select Yes if you are using a Plug and Play capable
operating system.
Select No if you need the BIOS to configure nonboot
devices.
Reset Configuration
Data:
No
Yes
Select Yes if you want to clear the system configuration
data.
Enable ACPI
No
Yes
Select Yes if you want to enable the advanced
configuration and power interface (ACPI) BIOS.
Use Multiprocessor
Specification
1.1
1.4
Configure the Multiprocessor Specification revision level.
Some OSs require 1.1 for compatibility.
Large Disk Access
Mode
CHS
LBA
Select the drive access method for IDE drives. Most OSs
use logical block addressing (LBA). However, some
operating systems may use the cylinder head sector
(CHS). See your OS documentation for further help.
continued
47
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Advanced Menu (continued)
Feature
Option
Description
Pause Before Boot
Disabled
Enabled
Pause five seconds before booting the OS.
PCI Configurations
Additional Setup menus to configure PCI devices.
PCI Device,
Embedded SCSI A
Setup items for configuring the specific PCI device.
Option ROM Scan:
Enabled
Disabled
Initialize device expansion ROM.
Enable Master:
Enabled
Disabled
Enable selected device as a PCI bus master.
Latency Timer:
Default
0020h
0040h
0060h
0080h
00A0h
00C0h
00E0h
Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in
units of PCI bus clocks.
Option ROM Scan:
Enabled
Disabled
Initialize device expansion ROM.
Enable Master:
Enabled
Disabled
Enable selected device as a PCI bus master.
Latency Timer:
Default
0020h
0040h
0060h
0080h
00A0h
00C0h
00E0h
Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in
units of PCI bus clocks.
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Configure serial port A using these options:
PCI Devices
I/O Device
Configuration
Serial Port A
•
Disabled—no configuration.
•
Enabled—user configuration.
•
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.
•
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by
the OS.
Base I/O Address
3F8
2F8
3E8
2E8
Set the base I/O address for serial port A.
Interrupt
IRQ3
IRQ4
Set the interrupt for serial port A.
continued
48
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Advanced Menu (continued)
Feature
Option
Description
Serial Port B
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Configure serial port B using these options:
•
Disabled—no configuration.
•
Enabled—user configuration.
•
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.
•
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by
the OS.
Base I/O Address
3F8
2F8
3E8
2E8
Set the base I/O address for serial port B.
Interrupt
IRQ3
IRQ4
Set the interrupt for serial port B.
Parallel Port
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Configure the parallel port using these options:
•
Disabled—no configuration.
•
Enabled—user configuration.
•
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.
•
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by
the OS.
Mode
Output only
Bidirectional
EPP
ECP
Set the mode for the parallel port.
Interrupt
IRQ5
IRQ7
Set the interrupt for the parallel port.
Diskette Controller
Disabled
Enabled
Auto
Configure the diskette controller using these options:
Base I/O Address
•
Disabled—no configuration.
•
Enabled—user configuration.
•
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.
•
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by
the OS.
Primary
Secondary
Set the base I/O address for the diskette controller.
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled automatically sets two-way or four-way
permuting based on the memory configuration. Enabled
requires:
Advanced Chip Set
Control
Address Bit Permuting
Card to Card
Interleave
Disabled
Enabled
•
number of rows to be a power of two.
•
all rows to be the same size.
•
all populated rows to be adjacent and start at row 0.
Enabled requires a symmetric RAM configuration
between two memory modules.
continued
49
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Advanced Menu (continued)
50
Feature
Option
Description
Base RAM Step
1 MB
1 KB
Every location
Tests base memory once per MB or once per KB or
every location.
Extended RAM Step
1 MB
1 KB
Every location
Tests extended memory once per MB or once per KB or
every location.
L2 Cache
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled causes the secondary cache to be sized and
enabled. Disabled causes the L2 cache to be disabled
for core clock frequency bus ratios equal to 2.
ISA Expansion
Aliasing
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled causes every I/O access with an address in the
range of x100h-x3FFh, x500h-x7FFh, x900h-xBFFh, and
xD00h-xFFFh to be internally aliased to the range 0100h03FFh before performing any other address range
checking.
Memory Scrubbing
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled lets the BIOS automatically detect and correct
single-bit memory errors.
Restreaming Buffer
Disabled
Enabled
When enabled, the data returned and buffered for a
delayed inbound read may be reaccessed following a
disconnect.
Read Prefetch for
PXB0A
16
32
64
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.
Read Prefetch for
PXB0B
16
32
64
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.
Read Prefetch for
PXB1A
16
32
64
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.
Multiboot Support
Disabled
Enabled
Only enable when the total number of bootable devices is
less than eight.
Special VGA Devnode
Disabled
Enabled
Enable this node only when nonPCI compliant VGA
cards need to be debugged. Enabling will impact I/O
resources for a large configuration.
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Security Menu
Feature
Option
Description
User Password Is
Clear
When you enter your user password, this field
automatically changes to set.
Administrator
Password Is
Clear
When you enter your administrator password, this field
automatically changes to set.
Set User Password
Enter
The user password controls access to the system at boot.
To enter a password, press <Enter> and follow the
screen prompts.
Set Administrator
Password
Enter
The administrator password controls access to the setup
utility. To enter a password, press <Enter> and follow
the screen prompts.
Password on Boot
Disabled
Enabled
Requires password entry before boot. The system
remains in the secure mode until you enter the password.
Password on Boot takes precedence over Secure Mode
Boot.
Diskette Access
User
Administrator
Controls access to diskette drives.
Secure Mode Timer
Disabled
1 min
2 min
5 min
10 min
20 min
1 hr
2 hr
Select the time-out period of keyboard or mouse inactivity
required before the secure mode activates. (A password
must be entered for the secure mode to work.)
Secure Mode Hot Key
[]
Select a hot key, and then press <Ctrl+Alt+(your hot
key)> to place the system in the secure mode. The key
should not conflict with any application. Available
choices are A-Z and 0-9. Press <Del> to remove the
hot key.
Secure Mode Boot
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled lets the system boots in the secure mode.
Requires a password to unlock the system.
Video Blanking
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled blanks video when the secure mode activates.
Requires a password to unlock the system.
Diskette Write Protect
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled write protects the diskette drive when the
Secure Mode activates. Requires a password to restore
the diskette writes.
Front Panel Lockout
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled disables the front panel controls when the
Secure Mode activates. Requires a password to unlock
the system.
51
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server Menu
Feature
Option
System Management
Description
An additional setup menu for changing server
management features.
Firmware SMIs
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled turns off all firmware SMI sources.
System Event Logging
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled logs critical system events.
Clear Event Log
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled cleans the system event log.
Assert NMI on AERR
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the Firmware SMIs
option is required to assert an NMI.
Assert NMI on BERR
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the Firmware SMIs
option is required to assert an NMI.
Assert NMI on PERR
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the SERR option is
required to activate this option.
Assert NMI on SERR
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled generates an NMI.
Enable Host Bus Error
Disabled
Enabled
Enables host single- and multi-bit errors.
Server Management
Information
Displays system serial number, part number, and server
management controller revisions. All items on this menu
cannot be modified in user mode. If any items require
changes, please consult your system administrator.
Board Part Number
Information only.
Board Serial Number
Information only.
System Part Number
Information only.
System Serial Number
Information only.
Chassis Part Number
Information only.
Chassis Serial
Number
Information only.
BMC Revision
Information only.
FPC Revision
Information only.
Primary HSBP
Revision
Information only.
Secondary HSBP
Revision
Information only.
Console Redirection
Additional setup menus to configure the console.
COM Port Address
Disabled
3F8
2F8
3E8
IRQ #
None
Select the port address. Make sure these values are
identical to those of serial ports A and B in the peripheral
configuration setup menu.
continued
52
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Server Menu (continued)
Feature
Option
Description
Baud Rate
9600
19.2 K
38.4 K
115.2 K
Select the baud rate.
Flow Control
No Flow Control
CTS/RTS
XON/XOFF
CTS/RTS + CD
Select the flow control.
•
CTS/RTS = Hardware
•
XON/XOFF = Software
•
CTS/RTS + CD = Hardware + carrier detect for
modem use.
Processor Retest
No
Yes
Yes causes the BIOS to clear historical processor status
and retest all processors on the next boot.
EMP Password Switch
Disabled
Enabled
Enable or disable the EMP password.
EMP ESC Sequence
The front panel controller firmware updates this field.
EMP Hangup Line
String
The front panel controller firmware updates this field.
Modem Init String
This string accepts up to 16 characters. The upper four
characters will go to the next field which will pop up as
soon as the 16th character is filled. Trying to fill the 17th
character in the same field will have a wraparound
problem.
EMP Access Mode
Preboot Only
Always Active
Disabled
Preboot Only—EMP enabled during power down or
POST.
Always Active—EMP always enabled.
Disabled—EMP disabled.
EMP Restricted Mode
Access
Disabled
Enabled
When enabled, power down, front panel NMI, and reset
control via EMP are disabled. Restricted mode can be
selected with preboot or always active.
EMP Direct
Connect/Modem
Mode
Direct Connect
Modem Mode
You can connect directly to the port or use a modem.
53
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Boot Menu
Feature
Option
Description
Diskette Check:
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled verifies the diskette type on boot. Disabled
speeds up the boot process.
Boot Device Priority
54
Select the search order for the types of boot devices.
1.
Diskette Drive
2.
Removable
Devices
3.
Hard Drive
4.
ATAPI CD-ROM
Drive
Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device.
Press <+> to move it up the list, and press <-> to move it
down the list. Press <Esc> to exit this menu.
Hard Drive
The system attempts to boot to the OS from the first hard
drive in this list. If it does not find an OS, the system tries
the next drive listed until if finds an OS. Use the up and
down arrow keys to select a device. Press <+> to move
it up the list, and press <-> to move it down the list.
Press <Esc> to exit this menu.
Removable Devices
The OS assigns drive letters to these devices in the order
displayed. Change the sequence and the drive lettering
of a device by selecting it with the up and down arrow
keys. Press <+> to move it up the list, and press <-> to
move it down the list. Press <Esc> to exit this menu.
Maximum Number of
I20 Drives
1
4
Selects the maximum number of I20 drives that will be
assigned a DOS drive letter.
Message Timeout
Multiplier
1
2
4
8
10
50
100
1000
All timeout values will be multiplied by this number.
Pause During Post
Disabled
Enabled
Select enabled when you need to start the IRTOS
manually. When you hear three beeps, POST has
stopped. Press any key to continue.
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run
Exit Menu Selections
The following menu options are available on the Server menu. Select an option by using the up or
down arrow keys. Then press <Enter> to execute the option, and follow the prompts.
Option
Description
Exit Saving Changes
Exit Setup and save your changes to CMOS.
Exit Discarding Changes
Exit Setup without saving data to CMOS.
Load Setup Defaults
Load default values for all Setup items.
Load Custom Defaults
Load settings from custom defaults.
Save Custom Defaults
Save changes to custom defaults. Normally PhoenixBios reads setup
settings from CMOS. However, if CMOS fails, it uses custom defaults—if you
have set them. If not, it uses factory defaults.
Discard Changes
Load previous values from CMOS for all Setup items.
Save Changes
Save Setup data to CMOS.
55
This page is blank
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run
The System Setup Utility (SSU) is on the Server System Configuration Software CD shipped with
the server. The SSU provides a graphical user interface (GUI) over an extensible framework for
server configuration. For the AC450NX systems, the SSU framework supports the following
functions and capabilities:
•
•
•
•
•
•
assigns resources to baseboard devices and add-in cards prior to loading the operating
system (OS)
allows you to specify boot device order and system security options
permits viewing and clearing of the system’s critical event log
Permits viewing of the system FRU and SDRs
allows troubleshooting of the server when the OS is not operational
provides a system level view of the server’s I/O devices
When to Run the System Setup Utility
The SSU is a DOS-based utility that supports extended system configuration operations for
onboard resources and add-in boards. The utility also allows you to view the system event log
(SEL) and to set system boot and security options. Use the SSU when you need to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
add and remove boards affecting the assignment of resources (ports, memory, IRQs, DMA)
modify the server’s boot device order or security settings
change the server configuration settings
save and restore the server configuration
view or clear the SEL
view FRU information
view the SDR table
If you install or remove an ISA add-in board, you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server.
Running the SSU is optional for a PCI and ISA Plug and Play add-in boards.
The SSU is PCI-aware, and it complies with the ISA Plug and Play specifications. The SSU works
with any compliant configuration (.CFG) file supplied by the peripheral device manufacturer.
The I/O baseboard comes with a .CFG file. The .CFG file describes the characteristics of the
board and the system resources that it requires. The configuration registers on PCI and ISA Plug
and Play add-in boards contain the same type of information that is in a .CFG file. Some ISA
boards also come with a .CFG file.
57
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
The SSU uses the information provided by .CFG files, configuration registers, flash memory, and
the information that you enter, to specify a system configuration. The SSU writes the
configuration information to flash memory.
The SSU stores configuration values in flash memory. These values take effect when you boot the
server. POST checks the values against the actual hardware configuration; if they do not agree,
POST generates an error message. You must then run the SSU to specify the correct configuration
before the server boots.
The SSU always includes a checksum with the configuration data so that the BIOS can detect any
potential data corruption before the actual hardware configuration takes place.
What You Need to Do
The SSU may be run directly from the Server Configuration Software CD or from a set of DOS
diskettes. If you choose to run the SSU from a set diskettes, you must copy the SSU from the
Server Configuration Software CD to diskettes and follow the instructions in the README.TXT
of diskette one. See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” to create a set of SSU
diskettes. Only diskette one of the set must be DOS bootable.
✏
NOTE
If your diskette drive is disabled, or improperly configured, you must use the
flash-resident Setup utility to enable it so that you can use the SSU. If
necessary, you can disable the drive after you exit the SSU. Information
entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup.
Running the SSU
•
58
Running the SSU Locally
Running the ssu.bat file provided on the SSU media starts the SSU. If the server boots directly
from the SSU media, the ssu.bat file runs automatically. If it boots from a different media, the
SSU can be started manually or by another application. When the SSU starts in the local
execution mode (the default mode), the SSU accepts input from the keyboard and/or mouse.
The SSU presents a VGA-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) on the primary monitor.
The SSU runs from writable, nonwritable, removable, and nonremovable media. If you run the
SSU from nonwritable media, all your preference settings will be lost because you cannot save
them.
The SSU supports the ROM-DOS V6.22 operating system. It can run on other ROM-DOS
compatible operating systems but they are not supported. The SSU will not operate from a
DOS-box running under an operating system such as Windows.
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
•
Running the SSU Remotely
To run the SSU remotely, you must invoke the SSU.BAT file with the /t switch and redirect
the text-mode output via BIOS console redirection. The /t switch puts the display in text mode
and allows the console to be viewed and controlled via BIOS console redirection.
First, configure the server for BIOS console redirection. Then configure the modem to
auto-answer and to “modem reaction to DTR set to return to command state.” After
configuring the server, it should be booted to a DOS prompt either locally or remotely through
the EMP. Once the server boots, the remote user can use any ANSI terminal emulation
program to connect to the configured COM port and invoke SSU /t. This process requires a
bootable DOS partition, and all files required for the SSU to run must be on the server.
Starting the SSU
The SSU consists of a collection of task-oriented modules plugged into a common framework
called the Application Framework (AF). The AF provides a launching point for individual tasks
and a location for setting customization information.
1. Turn on your video monitor and your system.
2. There are two ways to start the SSU.
a. From a set of SSU diskettes created from the CD: Insert SSU diskette 1 in drive A, and
press the push-button reset switch or <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to reboot your server from the
diskette. Follow the screen prompts.
b. From the Server Configuration Software CD: Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive,
and press the reset switch on the front panel or <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to reboot the server.
•
When prompted, press <F2> to enter BIOS Setup.
•
From the Boot Menu, select the Boot Device Priority option, and then select the
CD-ROM drive as your primary boot device.
•
Press <F10> to save the new settings.
•
Press <Enter> to exit BIOS Setup and boot from the CD.
•
From the CD menu, select Run Utilities and press <Enter>.
• Select Run System Setup Utility, and press <Enter>. Follow the screen prompts.
If you boot from the CD, skip to step 4.
3. The mouse driver loads if it is available; press <Enter> to continue.
4. When the main window of the SSU appears, you can customize the user interface before
continuing.
59
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Customizing the SSU
The SSU lets you customize the user interface according to your preferences. The AF sets these
preferences and saves them in the AF.INI file so that they take effect the next time you start the
SSU. There are four user-customizable settings.
✏
NOTE
If you run the SSU from nonwritable media like a CD, these preferences will
be lost when you exit the SSU.
•
•
Color—this button lets you change the default colors associated with different items on the
screen with predefined color combinations. The color changes are instantaneous.
Mode—this button lets you set the desired expertise level.
 novice
 intermediate
•
•
 expert
The expertise level determines which tasks are visible in the Available Tasks section and what
actions each task performs. For a new mode setting to take effect, the user must exit the SSU
and restart it.
Language—this button lets you change the strings in the SSU to strings of the appropriate
language. For a new language setting to take effect, you must exit the SSU and restart it.
Other—this button lets you change other miscellaneous options in the SSU. The changes are
instantaneous.
To change the interface default values:
Use the mouse to click on the proper button in the Preferences section of the SSU Main
window.
or
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button, and press the spacebar or <Enter>.
or
Access the menu bar with the mouse or hot keys (Alt + underlined letter).
Launching a Task
It is possible to have many tasks open at the same time, although some tasks may require complete
control to avoid possible conflicts. The tasks achieve complete control by keeping the task as the
center of operation until you close the task window.
To launch a task:
1. In the SSU Main window, double-click on the task name under Available Tasks to display the
main window for the selected task.
or
Highlight the task name, and click on OK.
or
60
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the task name, and press the <spacebar> or <Enter>.
Figure 5-1. System Setup Utility Main Window
Resource Configuration Add-in (RCA) Window
The RCA provides three major functions:
•
•
•
Creates representations of devices that cannot be discovered by the system (ISA cards)
Modifies the contents of the system by adding and removing devices
Modifies the resources used by devices
You can use the RCA window to define an ISA card or add an ISA card by clicking on the
appropriate button. Removing an ISA card requires that the card be highlighted in the Devices
section of the screen before clicking on the button.
✏
NOTE
You can only add as many ISA cards as you have available ISA slots in the
server.
61
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
1. From the SSU main window, launch the RCA by selecting the Resources task under the RCA
heading in the task box.
2. When the RCA window appears, it displays messages similar to the following:
Baseboard:
System Board
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 00 –- Host Processor Bridge
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0D –- SCSI Controller
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0F –- Ethernet Controller
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 12 –- Multifunction Controller
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 14 –- VGA Controller
3. To configure a device, select its name in the Devices section of the RCA window, and press
the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the name.
4. It is possible to close the RCA window and return to the AF by clicking on the Back to AF
button. Any changes made will be kept in memory for use by the RCA when it is rerun.
5. Save all the changes made by clicking on the Save button. Saving writes your current
configuration to nonvolatile storage where it will be available to the system after every reboot.
6. Closing the window by clicking on the system menu—the dash in the upper-left corner—
discards all changes.
Figure 5-2. RCA Window
62
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Defining an ISA Card
An ISA card usually comes with a vendor-created .CFG file that specifies the resources the card
requires to function properly. If the .CFG file is unavailable, you must manually create it or define
the card through the SSU. Defining an ISA card consists of specifying the name of the card and
the resources it consumes. This allows the RCA to consider the ISA card resource requirements
when the RCA tries to resolve conflicts. The system BIOS also uses the information to configure
the hardware when the system boots.
1. To add or remove ISA card resources, click on the appropriate resource buttons, select the
desired value, and click on Add or Remove.
2. After you complete the necessary information, click on Save.
3. To edit a card, click on Load to retrieve the card information. After making changes, click on
Save.
4. To create a card, click on New.
5. To remove a current definition of a card, click on Delete.
Figure 5-3. Define ISA Window
63
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Adding and Removing ISA Cards
Adding and removing cards through the RCA provides a way for the RCA to run its conflict
detection algorithms on the resources requested by the cards. This alerts you to any possible
problems with that particular card in the current configuration.
•
To add an ISA card:
1. Click on Add ISA Card in the RCA window.
2. Specify the directory for the .CFG file.
3. Select the file and click on Ok.
•
To remove an ISA card:
1. Select a valid ISA card in the Devices section of the RCA window.
2. Click on Remove ISA Card.
Modifying Resources
Modifying the resources of a device may be necessary to accommodate certain operating systems,
applications, and drivers. It may also be necessary to modify resources to resolve a conflict.
•
•
64
To modify the resources associated with a device:
1. Highlight the device in the Devices section of the RCA window.
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the entry.
This displays the functions of the selected device along with possible choices and the resources
associated with those choices.
To make a modification:
1. Highlight the function in the Configuration window.
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the entry (this updates the Choice and
resource lists).
3. Press the tab key to get to the Choice list, and press <Enter>.
4. Use the arrow keys to select a proper choice, and press <Enter> again.
5. If the choice allows multiple possible values for a particular resource, use the hot key to
select a resource, and press the spacebar or double-click on the resource.
6. Select the desired resource, and click on Ok.
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Figure 5-4. Configuration Window
65
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
System Resource Usage
Clicking on the Resource Use button in the Configuration window displays the System Resource
Usage window. This window shows what resources each device is consuming. This information
is useful for choosing resources if a conflict occurs. Devices can be organized according to the
resources you want to examine using the options in the Resource section of the screen. The
resource information can also be written to a plain text file though this window.
Figure 5-5. System Resource Usage Window
66
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Multiboot Add-in
The Multiboot Add-in (MBA) provides an interface for selecting Initial Program Load (IPL)
devices. Using the MBA, you can identify all IPL devices in the system and prioritize their boot
order. On power-up, the BIOS sequentially attempts to boot from each device.
To change the boot device priority:
1. Click on the device to select it.
2. Click on the Move Up button to move the device up.
3. Click on Move Down button to move the device down.
4. Click on the Save button to save the boot order in the system nonvolatile storage.
Figure 5-6. Multiboot Main Window
67
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Security Add-in
The Security Add-in (PWA) provides security and password support options. Within the PWA,
you can either set or modify the User and Administrator passwords or update any of the various
security options available.
To Set the User Password
1. Click on the user password button.
2. Enter the password in the first field.
3. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field.
To Change or Clear the User Password
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the User password button.
Enter the old password in the first field.
Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password.
Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the
password.
To Set the Administrator Password
1. Click on the Administrator password button.
2. Enter the password in the first field.
3. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field.
To Change or Clear the Administrator Password
1.
2.
3.
4.
68
Click on the Administrator password button.
Enter the old password in the first field.
Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password.
Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the
password.
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Security Options
Under this window, you can set the other security options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hot Key—set a key sequence that, when pressed, will drop the server into secure mode.
Lock-Out Timer—set an interval that, if no activity takes place during it, will drop the server
into secure mode.
Secure Boot Mode—force the server to boot directly into secure mode.
Video Blanking—turn off the video when the server is in secure mode.
Floppy Write—control access to the diskette drive while the server is in secure mode.
Front Panel Lockout—control the power and reset buttons while the server is in secure mode.
Figure 5-7. Password Main Window
69
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
System Event Log Manager Add-in
Clicking on the SEL Manger add-in task brings up the SEL Manager window. It lets you examine
SEL records:
•
•
•
via the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) in hex or verbose mode
by sensor type or event type in hex or verbose mode
from a previously stored binary file in hex or verbose mode
The SEL Manager window also lets you:
•
•
save the SEL records to a file in either text or binary form
clear the SEL entries from the nonvolatile storage area
SEL Manager Menus
Click on
to
File
Load SEL
view data from a previously saved SEL file
Save SEL
save the currently loaded SEL data to a file
Clear SEL
clear the SEL data from the BMC
Exit
quit the SEL Viewer
SEL Info
display information about the SEL (these fields are
display only)
All Events
display the current SEL data from the BMC
By Sensor
bring up a pop-up menu that allows you to load only the
data from a certain sensor type
By Event
bring up a pop-up menu that allows you to load only the
data from a certain event type
View
View Realtime
Settings
Display HEX
toggle between the Hex/interpreted mode of displaying
the SEL records
Display Verbose
Output Binary
determine whether SEL data will be saved to the file (as
under File - Save) in binary format or verbose format
Output Text
Help
70
About
display the SEL Viewer version information
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Figure 5-8. System Event Log Main Window
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In
In this window, you can:
•
•
•
•
Examine all SDR records through the BMC (in either Hex or Verbose mode)
Examine SDR records by Record type (in either Hex or Verbose mode)
Examine SDR records from a previously stored binary file (in either Hex or Verbose mode)
Save the SDR records to a file (in either text or binary form)
The SDR Manager can display SDR records in either raw form (hexadecimal) or in an interpreted,
easy-to-understand textual form (verbose).
The SDR Manager’s main window provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each
option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by
an underlined letter in the text listing the option.
71
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Menu
Click On
To
File
Open FRU
Save SDR
Exit
Opens FRU data from a previously saved file
Saves SDR data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format
Quits the SDR Manager
View
SDR Info
All Records
By Record
Displays SDR information as returned by the GetSDRInfo interface
of the BMC
Displays all records in the SDR repository
Displays all records in the SDR repository, sorted by record type
Settings
Display HEX
Display Verbose
Output Text
Output Binary
Displays SDR records in Hex format
Displays SDR records in verbose format
Saves SDR data in verbose format
Saves SDR data in binary format
Help
About
Displays SDR Manager version information
Figure 5-9. SDR Manager Main Window
72
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager
In this window you can:
•
•
•
•
Examine all FRU Inventory areas on the server (in either Hex or Verbose mode)
Examine individual FRU Inventory areas (in either Hex or Verbose mode)
Examine FRU Inventory areas from a previously stored binary file (in either Hex or Verbose
mode)
Save the FRU Inventory areas to a file (in either text or binary form)
The FRU Manager can display the FRU Inventory areas in either raw form (hexadecimal) or in an
interpreted, easy-to-understand textual form (verbose). The FRU manager’s main window
provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each option included on the main menu
supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by an underlined letter in the text
listing the option.
Menu
Click On
To
File
Open FRU
Save FRU
Exit
Opens FRU data from a previously saved file
Saves FRU data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format
Quits the FRU Manager
View
FRU Info
All FRU Areas
By Device Type
Displays FRU information of the selected device
Displays FRU areas of all devices
Displays FRU areas sorted by device type
Settings
Display HEX
Display Verbose
Output Text
Output Binary
Displays FRU areas in Hex format
Displays FRU areas in verbose format
Saves FRU data in verbose format
Saves FRU data in binary format
Help
About
Displays FRU Manager version information
73
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Figure 5-10. FRU Manager Main Window
Exiting the SSU
Exiting the SSU causes all windows to close.
1. Exit the SSU by opening the menu bar item File in the SSU Main window. See “System Setup
Utility Main Window” on page 61.
2. Click on Exit.
or
Highlight Exit, and press <Enter>.
74
6 SCSI Configuration Utility
The SCSI configuration utility allows you to configure/view the settings of the host adapters and
devices in the server. For information about the SCSI Configuration Utility refer to the PCI SCSI
Device Manager System Users Guide.
75
7 Emergency Management Port Console:
How to Use
The Emergency Management Port (EMP) Console provides an interface to the Emergency
Management Port (EMP). This interface allows remote server management via a modem or direct
connection.
The server control operations available with EMP Console are:
•
•
•
Connecting to remote servers
Powering the server on or off
Resetting the server
The EMP Console uses three management plug-ins to monitor the server:
•
•
•
SEL Viewer (not available on AC450NX servers)
SDR Viewer (not available on AC450NX servers)
FRU Viewer
The EMP Console also has a Phonebook plug-in that can be used to create and maintain a list of
servers and their phone numbers.
77
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
How EMP Console Works
The EMP shares use of the COM 2 port with the system on the server. When the EMP has control
of the port, the port operates in command mode. When the system has control, the port operates in
console redirect mode. When connecting to a server, the EMP Console checks to determine the
mode of the COM 2 port. The following discussion covers how EMP Console functions in each
mode:
•
•
Command mode is the default COM 2 state. In this state, EMP Console communicates with
the server’s firmware, allowing the client to remotely reset or power the server up or down.
The client can also view the server’s System Event Log (SEL), Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
information, or Sensor Data Record (SDR) table.
In console redirect mode, EMP Console serves as a PC ANSI terminal window for BIOS
console redirection. Commands typed in this terminal window are transmitted through BIOS
to the server’s console, and text displayed on the server console is displayed on the EMP
Console’s terminal window. In this mode, you can remotely view boot messages, access BIOS
setup, and run DOS text mode applications through the EMP Console’s terminal window.
Figure 7-1. EMP Console in Command State
78
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
Figure 7-2. EMP Console in Redirect State
Figure 7-2 shows the EMP Console window in redirect mode with the terminal window. The text
that appears on the server monitor displays in the Redirect window.
Availability of the various EMP Console features are determined by two factors: the BIOS EMP
access mode and whether the server’s COM 2 port is configured for console redirection. The three
EMP access modes are: disabled, pre-boot, and always active.
Table 7-1. EMP Console Access Modes (Server configured for console redirection)
Mode
Server is powered off
During POST
After OS boots
Disabled
Redirect window appears,
but is blank
Redirect window
Redirect window
Pre-boot
EMP commands available
Redirect window*
Redirect window
Always Active
EMP commands available
Redirect window*
EMP commands available
* The operation mode can be modified by selections in the Reset and Power on/off dialogs. These are server control
dialogs available in EMP Console.
79
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Table 7-2. EMP Console Access Modes (Server not configured for console redirection)
Mode
Server is powered off
During POST
After OS boots
Disabled
Redirect window appears,
but is blank
Redirect window appears,
but is blank
Redirect window appears,
but is blank
Pre-boot
EMP commands available
EMP commands available
Redirect window appears,
but is blank
Always Active
EMP commands available
EMP commands available
EMP commands available
Requirements
This section outlines the requirements and configurations necessary for using EMP Console.
Operating Systems:
•
•
Windows 95
 16 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended
 20 MB disk space
Windows NT†
 Windows NT 4.0
 24 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended
 20 MB disk space
Client Configuration: EMP Console supports all COM ports on the client system, along with any
Windows NT/95 compatible modem.
Server Configuration: EMP Console requires the server’s COM 2 port to be connected to an
external modem or directly connected to a serial cable.
Direct Connect Configuration: A null modem serial cable is needed. Connect one end of the
cable to the COM 2 port of server and the other to a port on the client machine.
Modem Configuration: On the client, EMP Console uses the Windows Application Program
Interface (API) to determine if a modem is connected and available. The EMP Console does not
configure the modem; it should be preconfigured through Windows.
For modem support, the server must use a Hayes compatible modem that supports a baud rate
of 19.2k. The modem must be on the NT Hardware Compatibility List provided by Microsoft.
The server modem must be set in auto-answer mode for EMP Console to be able to connect to it.
80
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
Setting Up the Server for the EMP
To use the EMP, you must configure the server’s BIOS with specific settings. These settings are
found in the BIOS Server menu and the Console Redirection submenu. The BIOS settings
section, found earlier in this document, shows all the available options. This section focuses on the
settings that must be configured in order to use the EMP.
Server Menu
All EMP related settings occur in the Server main menu. Change only the items below; all other
default settings should remain the same.
EMP Password Switch & EMP Password: Anytime an attempt to initiate a connection is made,
a prompt for the user password appears. If no EMP password is setup, then anyone can access the
EMP by clicking OK.
In the EMP Password area of the Server menu, the EMP Password Switch option must be set to
enable. Then type in a password of up to eight alphanumeric characters. If a beep is heard, the
password was accepted.
EMP Access Modes: Choose either Disabled, Pre-boot, or Always Active, depending on the type
of EMP access needed. The tables above show what is available with a given setting.
EMP Restricted Mode Access: Set Restricted Mode to either enabled or disabled as needed. If in
enabled mode, this means that EMP Console’s server control options, Power off and Reset, are
unavailable, except power on. In disabled mode, these same server control options are available.
EMP Direct Connect/Modem Mode: Select Direct Connect if a null modem serial cable directly
connects the server’s COM 2 port to the EMP Console client machine. If they are connected via a
modem, select Modem Mode.
Console Redirection Submenu
The settings in the Console Redirection Submenu of the Server menu must be set exactly as noted
to be able to use the EMP.
COM Port Address: Select 2F8. This is the COM 2 port that must be used by the EMP. The
IRQ# setting is automatically populated with the correct number based on the COM Port Address
choice.
Baud Rate: Select 19.2k.
Flow Control: Select CTS/RTS + CD.
81
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Main EMP Console Window
The main EMP Console window provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to access server control
operations and to launch the management plug-ins. At the top of the window is the menu and tool
bar. These provide the options to initiate plug-ins and other support features. A status bar at the
bottom displays connection information such as server name, line status, and mode.
Toolbar
The tool bar buttons of the EMP Console main window combine server control and management
plug-in commands available from both the Connect and Action menus as follows:
Displays the Connect dialog to allow connection to a selected server.
Disconnects from the currently connected server.
Displays the Power On/Off dialog.
Displays the Reset dialog.
Launches the SEL Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)
Launches the SDR Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)
Launches the FRU Viewer.
Displays the Phonebook Dialog.
Displays the online help.
Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the main window. It contains the following status
information:
•
•
•
•
82
SERVER NAME: the name of the connected server when connecting via modem.
LINE: the type of line connection. This is either direct or modem.
MODE: either Redirect of EMP, depending on whether the EMP has control of the COM 2
port.
LINE STATUS: gives status information about the server connection. For example, if a
server is connected, the status bar says "Connected." Otherwise, the line is blank.
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
EMP Console Main Menu
•
File
 Exit - Exits EMP Console
• Connect
 Disconnect - disconnects the server connection.
 [Re]Connect - displays the connect dialog.
 A list of the five most recent modem connections. Click on one of these server names to
initiate a connection.
• Action
 Power On/Off - displays the Power on/off dialog.
 Reset - displays the Reset dialog.
 SEL Viewer - displays the SEL Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)
 SDR Viewer - displays the SDR Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)
 FRU Viewer - displays the FRU Viewer.
 Phonebook - displays the Phonebook dialog.
• Help
 Help Topics - help topics for EMP Console.
 Help About - provides version information.
83
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server Control Operations
Three server control operations are available from the menu or toolbar in EMP Console: remote
server connection, powering the server on and off, and resetting the server. The server console
mode can also be switched between EMP active and BIOS redirect modes through post-power-up
and reset options.
Connect
When [Re]Connect is selected from the Connect menu, the Connect dialog in Figure 7-3 is
displayed. This dialog allows you to connect to a server. If the client machine is already
connected to a server, initiating connection generates a warning message. The message indicates
that the existing connection will be terminated if you continue trying to initiate the new
connection. You are prompted to enter the EMP password whenever a connection is attempted.
Figure 7-3. Connect Dialog
Options available in the dialog are:
•
•
•
•
84
Line Selection - you can specify whether to use a direct connection or dial-up modem
connection to the server.
 Dial-up - connects to a selected server with a modem.
 Direct connect (Serial Line) - connects to the selected server directly using a null modem
serial cable.
Server - a server name can be selected from the dropdown list of available servers. A server
must be selected when the line selection is Dial-up.
Serial Line - These options are enabled when the line selection is set to Direct connect (Serial
Line).
 Baud Rate - must be 19200 for EMP to connect properly.
 COM Port No. - set the COM Port number to the port which the null modem serial cable
is connected to.
Connect - initiates the connection to the connected server. When this button is clicked, you
are prompted for the EMP password.
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
•
•
•
Config - displays the Phonebook dialog.
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.
Power On/Off
Selecting Power On/Off from the Action menu displays the Power on/off dialog. This dialog
provides commands to remotely power on or power off the server.
Figure 7-4. Power On/Off Dialog
Options available in the dialog are:
•
•
•
•
•
Power ON - powers on the server.
Power OFF - powers off the server. This option is not allowed if the server is configured in
RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations.
Post-power-up option - sets the mode selection of the server to EMP active or BIOS
redirection. The setting is available after the next power-up. The default selection is EMP
active.
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.
85
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Reset
Selecting Reset from the Action menu displays the Reset dialog. This dialog provides the ability
to remotely reset the server with post-reset options.
Figure 7-5. Reset Dialog
Options available in the dialog are:
•
•
•
•
86
System Reset - resets the server with the selected post-reset options. This operation is not
allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations.
Post-reset option - sets the post-reset option that will be in effect after reset. The options are
EMP active or BIOS redirection. The default selection is EMP active.
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use
Phonebook
EMP Console provides a support plug-in known as Phonebook. It stores names and numbers of
servers in a list that can be updated by adding, modifying or deleting entries. Phonebook can be
opened from the main menu and toolbar, or launched from the Connect dialog by clicking the
Config button.
Figure 7-6. Phonebook Dialog
Options available in the dialog are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Server - a dropdown list of server names stored in Phonebook. If the New radio button is
selected in the Operation area, this area is cleared.
Phone No. - the number of the selected server. If the New radio button is selected in the
Operation area, this area is cleared.
Operation
 New - lets you add a new entry in the Phonebook. Selecting this option clears the Server
and Phone No. fields. You must click Save for the entry to be added to the Phonebook.
 Modify - lets you edit an existing entry. You must select an existing entry from the Server
dropdown list box and modify the existing phone number before selecting this option.
Click Save in order to update the entry in the phonebook.
 Delete - lets you delete an entry from the Phonebook. You must first select an existing
server from the Server dropdown list box before selecting this option. You must click
Save for the entry to be deleted.
Save - saves a new or modified Phonebook entry, or deletes an entry if the Delete radio button
is selected.
Connect - displays the Connect dialog with the server from the Phonebook’s Server dropdown
list box already populating the Connect dialog’s Server field.
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.
87
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
FRU Viewer
The FRU Viewer allows you to view the server’s FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) data from the
server’s Front Panel FRU information area. The options available in the FRU Viewer are:
•
•
•
•
•
View all FRU records
View FRU summary info
Set FRU display mode to either Hex or verbose mode
Close the FRU Viewer
Exit EMP Console
FRU Viewer Menu Options
The following menu options are found on the FRU Viewer menu bar:
•
•
•
•
•
File
 Close - closes the FRU Viewer.
 Exit - exits EMP Console.
View
 Display all Records - displays all FRU data, which consists of chassis, board, and product
information.
 FRU Info - displays the FRU summary information as returned by the server.
Settings - lets you change operating parameters for the FRU Viewer. This menu displays the
following options:
 Display HEX/Verbose - toggles between HEX mode and interpreted mode of displaying
FRU records.
Window - gives options for displaying currently open windows.
Help
 Help Topics - help topics for EMP Console.
 Help About - provides version information.
This page is blank
88
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
The Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) Load Utility is a DOS based
program used to update the server management subsystem’s product level FRU, SDR, and the
Desktop Management Interface (DMI) nonvolatile storage components (EEPROMs). The
load utility:
•
•
•
•
•
discovers the product configuration based on instructions in a master configuration file
displays the FRU information (it may have values the user can change)
updates the nonvolatile storage device (EEPROM) associated with the Baseboard Management
Controller (BMC) that holds the SDR and FRU area
updates the DMI area located in the BIOS nonvolatile storage device
generically handles FRU devices that may not be associated with the BMC
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility
The FRUSDR Load Utility can be used to:
•
•
•
•
Read the system FRU and SDR information.
Load the FRU information using the configuration file.
Update the sensor data records after adding or removing processors in your server. It
programs the sensors that need to be monitored for server management.
Enter the Asset Tag after upgrade/replacement of the PHP I/O baseboard.
The server must be rebooted to properly initialize the sensors after programming the Sensor Data
Records. To do this, turn the server off and disconnect the AC power cords from the server power
supplies. Wait approximately 30 seconds, reconnect the power cords, and turn the server on.
What You Need to Do
The FRUSDR Load Utility may be run directly from the Configuration Software CD or from
diskettes you create from the CD. Before you can run the FRUSDR Load Utility from a diskette,
you must copy the utility from the Server Configuration Software CD to a DOS-bootable diskette.
See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” to create an FRUSDR Load Utility
diskette.
✏
NOTE
If your diskette drive is disabled, or improperly configured, you must use
BIOS Setup to enable it. If necessary, you can disable the drive after you are
done with the FRUSDR utility.
89
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility
This utility is compatible with ROM-DOS Ver. 6.22, MS-DOS Ver. 6.22, and later versions. The
utility accepts CFG, SDR and FRU load files. The executable file for the utility is frusdr.exe. The
utility requires the following supporting files:
•
•
•
one or more .fru files describing the system’s field replaceable units
a .cfg file describing the system configuration
a .sdr file describing the sensors in the system
Command Line Format
The basic command line format is:
frusdr [-?] [-h] [-d {dmi, fru, sdr}] [-cfg filename.cfg] -p -v
Command
Description
frusdr
Is the name of the utility.
-? or -h
Displays usage information.
-d {dmi, fru, sdr}
Only displays requested area.
-cfg filename.cfg
Uses custom CFG file.
-p
Pause between blocks of data.
-v
Verbose, display any additional details.
Parsing the Command Line
The FRUSDR Load Utility allows only one command line function at a time. A command line
function may consist of two parameters; for example, -cfg filename.cfg. Any invalid parameters
result in displaying an error message and exiting the program. You can use either a slash (/) or a
minus sign (-) to specify command line options. The -p and -v options may be used in conjunction
with any of the other options.
Displaying Usage Information
When the utility is run with the -? or -h command line flags, the following message is displayed
when the verbose flag -v is added to the help command:
FRU & SDR Load Utility Version 2.0
Usage:
90
frusdr
Is the name of the utility.
-? Or -h
Displays usage information.
-d {dmi,fru,sdr}
Only displays requested area.
-cfg filename.cfg
Uses custom CFG file.
-p
Pause between blocks of data.
-v
Verbose, display any additional details.
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
Copyright (c) 1998, Intel Corporation, All Rights Reserved
This utility must be run from a system executing DOS. Running in a Window’s
DOS box is insufficient and will provide incorrect results. Programming the
BMC FRU area clears the SDR table, therefore the SDR table must be
reprogrammed. Upon completing the programming of the FRU and SDR areas, the
server should be rebooted.
Note: DOS users may alternatively use a ’/’ instead of the ’-’.
The following information is display if -v option is included in the command line.
The /D FRU command may be followed with up to 16 device addresses.
These
device addresses are used to view up to 16 different FRU areas, instead of
the default of displaying the BMC FRU. The arguments following the "-d FRU"
are in the same order and value as the NVS_TYPE, NVS_LUN, DEV_BUS and
DEV_ADDRESS which are found in the FRU file header in each FRU file. The
LUN address is optional.
If the LUN address is used, it must start with
an ’L’.
Usage:
FRUSDR -d fru (device) [lun] (bus) (addr) (addr2) (etc)
Example:
FRUSDR /D FRU IMBDEVICE L00 00 C0 C2
The configuration file may be used to load multiple FRU and SDR files.
In the configuration file, you may define which FRU and SDR areas are to
be programmed. Additionally, you may request information from the user
or ask the user to choose which areas to program.
To read this area
Enter this command line
I/O Baseboard FRU
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE FF 20
Front Panel FRU
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE 00 22
CPU baseboard FRU
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 98
Top Mem Mod FRU
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 9A
Bottom Mem Mod FRU
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 9E
Interconnect Backplane FRU
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 01 A2
I/O Riser FRU
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 01 AE
Power Distribution Backplane FUR
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE L02 00 22
SCSI Hot Swap Backplane FRU
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE 00 C0
Term card in Slot 1
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A0
Term card in Slot 2
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A4
Term card in Slot 3
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A8
Term card in Slot 4
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 AC
91
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Displaying a Given Area
When the utility is run with the -d DMI, -d FRU, or -d SDR command line flag, the indicated area
is displayed. Each area represents a sensor; one sensor for each instrumented device in the server.
If the given display function fails because of an inability to parse the data present or a hardware
failure, the utility displays an error message and exits.
Displaying DMI Area
Each DMI area displayed is headed with the DMI area designated name. In each area, each field
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number.
Example:
To display the DMI area, type frusdr -d dmi -v -p and press <Enter>. A message similar to the
following appears:
Displaying DMI Area...
System Information (Type 1, 8 bytes)
Manufacturer
= Intel
Product
= AC450NX Server System
Version
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Serial Number
= Z00418630
Board Information (Type 2, 8 bytes)
Manufacturer
= Intel Corp.
Product
= AC450NX Server System
Version
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Serial Number
= 0123456789
Chassis Information (Type 3, 9 bytes)
Manufacturer
= Intel
Type
= Main Server Chassis
Version
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Serial Number
= Z00418630
Asset Tag#
=
Displaying FRU Area
The FRU area is displayed in ASCII format when the field is ASCII or as a number when the field
is a number. Each FRU area displayed is headed with the FRU area designated name. Each field
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number. The Board, Chassis, and
Product FRU areas end with an END OF FIELDS CODE that indicates there is no more data in
this area. The Internal Use area is displayed in hex format, 16 bytes per line.
92
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
Example:
To display the FRU area, type frusdr -d fru and press <Enter>. A message similar to the
following appears:
Common Header Area (Version 1, Length 8)
Header Area Version
= 01h
Internal Area Offset = 01h
Chassis Area Offset
= 0Ah
Board Area Offset
= 0Eh
Product Area Offset
= 16h
PAD
= 00h
PAD
= 00h
CHECKSUM
= D0h
Internal Information Area (Version 0, Length 72)
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Chassis Information Area (Version 1, Length 32)
Chassis Type
= 11h
Part Number (ASCII)
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Serial Number (ASCII) = Z00418630
END OF FIELDS CODE
Board Information Area (Version 1, Length 64)
Unicode Country Base
= 00h
Manufacturing Time (mins)
= 733803
Manufacturer Name (ASCII)
= Intel
Product Name (ASCII)
= AC450NX Server System
Serial Number (ASCII)
= 0123456789
Part Number (ASCII)
= 664653-001
END OF FIELDS CODE
93
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Product Information Area (Version 1, Length 80)
Unicode Country Base
= 00h
Manufacturer Name (ASCII)
= Intel
Product Name (ASCII)
= AC450NX Server System
Part Number (ASCII)
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Version (ASCII)
=
Serial Number (ASCII)
= 0123456789
Asset Tag (ASCII)
=
END OF FIELDS CODE
Displaying SDR Area
The SDR nonvolatile storage area is displayed in the following hex format. The data is separated
by a Sensor Record Number X header, where X is the number of that sensor record in the SDR
area. The next line after the header is the sensor record data in hex format delineated by spaces.
Each line holds up to 16 bytes. The data on each line is followed by the same data in ASCII
format; nonprintable characters are substituted by a period (.).
Example:
To display the SDR area, type frusdr -d sdr and press <Enter>. A message similar to the
following appears:
Reading SDR Record #1
0E 00 10 01 37 20 00 0F 05 00 10 F1 F8 02 01 85
....7..........
02 00 00 00 04 00 00 C4 02 00 08 30 C2 07 91 95
...........0....
8E FF 00 1B 1B 00 99 95 00 8A 8E 02 02 00 01 CC
................
53 43 53 49 2D 42 2D 54 65 72 6D 33
SCSI-B-Term3
Reading SDR Record #2
0E 40 10 01 30 20 00 13 05 00 10 F1 F8 04 01 05
[email protected] ..........
00 00 00 20 29 00 00 1E 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ... )...........
94
00 FF 00 03 03 00 00 00 00 42 49 02 02 00 01 C5
.........BI.....
46 41 4E 2D 32
FAN-2
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run
Using Specified CFG File
The utility can be run with the command line parameter of -cfg filename.cfg. The filename can be
any DOS accepted, eight-character filename string. The utility loads the specified CFG file and
uses the entries in the configuration file to probe the hardware and to select the proper SDRs to
load into nonvolatile storage.
Displaying Utility Title and Version
The utility displays its title:
FRU & SDR Load Utility, Version xx.xx
Configuration File
The configuration file is in ASCII text. The utility executes commands formed by the strings
present in the configuration file. These commands cause the utility to perform various tasks
needed to ultimately load the proper SDRs into the nonvolatile storage of the BMC and possibly
generic FRU devices. Because some of the commands are interactive, you are required to make a
choice.
Prompting for Product Level FRU Information
Through the use of a configuration file, the utility may prompt the user for FRU information.
Filtering Sensor Data Record From the SDR File
The MASTER.SDR file has all the possible SDRs for the system. These records may need to be
filtered based on the current product configuration. The configuration file directs the filtering of
the SDRs.
Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area
After the configuration is determined, the utility updates the FRU nonvolatile storage area. First it
verifies the Common Header area and checksum from the specified FRU file. The Internal Use
Area is read out of the specified .FRU file and is programmed into the nonvolatile storage. The
Chassis Area is read out of the specified .FRU file. Last it reads the Product Area out of the
specified FRU file, then the area is programmed into the FRU nonvolatile storage. All areas are
also written to the FRU.TMP file.
95
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Updating DMI Nonvolatile Storage Area
After programming the BMC FRU area, the utility then programs the following Chassis, Board,
and Product FRU information to the DMI fields.
Example:
Loading DMI System Area
Manufacturer Name : Intel
Name : AC450NX Server System
Version Number : ASDK128M1P2MBPP
Serial Number : 0123456789
Loading DMI Board Area
Manufacturing Name : Intel
Name : AC450NX Server System
Serial Number : 0123456789
Version Number : 661880-303
Loading DMI Chassis Area
Chassis Part Number : 693792-003
Chassis Serial Number : Z00418630
Asset Tag :
If a failure occurs, the utility displays an error message and exits.
Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area
After the utility validates the header area of the supplied SDR file, it updates the SDR repository
area. Before programming, the utility clears the SDR repository area. The utility filters all tagged
SDRs depending on the product configuration set in the configuration file. Nontagged SDRs are
automatically programmed. The utility also copies all written SDRs to the SDR.TMP file; it
contains an image of what was loaded. The TMP file is also useful for debugging the server.
Cleaning Up and Exiting
If an update was successfully performed, the utility displays a single message and then exits.
If the utility fails, it immediately exits with an error message and exit code.
96
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping
This chapter tells how to hot-swap a fan.
When the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which fan is
defective by checking the yellow fan failure LEDs mounted next to each fan. When a fan fails, the
LED will be on continuously. However, you do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a
failed fan.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#2 bit)
•
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
•
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server.
97
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Hot-Swapping a Fan
The server contains six fans in a (5 + 1) redundant configuration for cooling system components. If
a single fan fails, the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on. A fan-fail LED mounted
next to each fan identifies the failed fan. You can easily hot-swap the defective fan without
turning the server power off.
CAUTION
Even though the server can continue operating with only five fans, the
defective fan must be replaced in a reasonable amount of time.
Removing a Fan
See Figure 9-1.
1. Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array cover.
2. Slide the fan array cover to the server front to free the cover from the locking tabs and lift the
cover.
✏
NOTE
The fan array cover can be removed by first removing the top cover. See Chapter 12, “Server
Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Look at the yellow fan failure LEDs to determine which fan is defective.
WARNING
The fan blade may still be rotating. To avoid injury wait until it stops
rotating before grabbing the fan with your free hand.
4. Use the grasp holes and remove the defective fan.
5. Set it aside.
98
Chapter 9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping
A
B
OM07304
Figure 9-1. Removing/Hot-swapping a Fan
A.
B.
Grasp holes
Fan
99
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Replacing a Fan
See Figure 9-1.
1. Remove the new fan from the protective packaging.
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the fan in your equipment log.
✏
NOTE
Fans are keyed and can only be inserted one way. Be sure that the fan connector will mate with the
front panel baseboard connector when aligning the fan in the fan cavity.
3. Align the fan with the fan cavity.
4. Lower the fan into the cavity.
5. Replace the fan array cover and secure it with the screw removed earlier.
White text
100
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives:
Installing/Hot Swapping
Hot-docking Bays
Two 3.5-inch hot-docking bays provide space for 3.5-inch wide by 1-inch high single connector
attachment (SCA) SCSI hard disk drives. You can install up to 2 industry-standard wide/fast-20
SCSI III SCA-type hard disk drives in these bays.
The power supply fans provide cooling for the hot swap drives. A system with two power supplies
is capable of cooling most drives that would be installed into the system, however drives which
dissipate a large amount of power may require three power supplies to be installed into the system
to insure proper cooling. Refer to the product specifications to determine if the particular drive to
be installed needs the additional cooling provided by a third power supply.
Carriers for 3.5-inch wide 1-inch or 1.6-inch height drives allow easy hot-swapping of drives in
and out of these bays without shutting down the server.
By installing a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) controller board on the PHP I/O
baseboard, RAID software, and SCSI hard disk drives in the hot-docking bays, you can easily set
up RAID applications.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#2 bit)
•
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
•
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
101
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives
The server supports a variety of single-ended and differential SCSI SCA-type hard disk drives. As
shipped from the supplier, the server may not contain any drives. Contact your sales representative
or dealer for a list of approved drives that can be installed in the server.
Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier
See Figures 10-1 and 10-2.
1. Remove the 3.5-inch hard disk drive from the protective wrapper, and place it on an antistatic
surface.
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.
3. Orient the drive carrier so that the handle is toward your left and the metal EMI/ESD fingers
are toward your right.
4. Orient the drive so that the board-side faces toward the finger-side of the carrier and the SCA
connector faces away from you.
5. Being careful not to damage the metal fingers of the carrier, place it on the drive.
6. Place the drive and carrier assembly on an antistatic surface of a table or a workbench so that
the drive handle and fingers overlap the edge of the table or the workbench.
7. Using four screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach the carrier to the
drive.
CAUTION
Some specific hard disk drive designs require electrical isolation of the drive
from the chassis or other ground paths. These drives are usually clearly
labeled with this requirement on the drive. Full-height, 1.6-inch drives with
this requirement must have an electrical isolator such as durable mylar tape
placed between the EMI/ESD grounding fingers and the top cover of the
drive. Failure to isolate this type of drive from the ground path will result in
unpredictable operation of the drive, including severely impacted
performance and data corruption.
102
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping
A
B
D
A
C
OM07153
Figure 10-1. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier
A.
B.
C.
D.
EMI/ESD grounding clips and fingers
SCA connector
SCSI hard disk drive
Drive carrier handle
OM08268
Figure 10-2. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly
A.
Four screws
103
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-docking Bay
See Figure 10-3.
1. Orient the carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-docking bay guide rails so that metal
fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make sure that the
carrier is placed correctly into the guide rails to avoid damage.
2. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the
drive docks with the peripheral bay backplane connector.
CAUTION
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push
the assembly into the bay. Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of
the bracket.
104
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping
A
OM07336
Figure 10-3. Installing a Hard Disk Drive
A.
B.
C.
Drive carrier latch
Drive carrier handle
Hot-docking bay guide rails
3. If you installed a RAID controller board in your server, run the Disk Array Controller Configuration
utility supplied with the board. See the manufacturer’s documentation provided with the board.
105
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Hot-swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive
Status LEDs are arranged in sets of three below each of the 2 hot-docking bays. They monitor the
status of each drive. When a yellow LED is on continuously, it is okay to hot-swap (remove and
replace) a bad drive with a good one. You do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a drive.
SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions
SCSI drive,
power on
green LED
SCSI drive
active
green LED
SCSI drive
faulty*
yellow LED
On
Off
Off
On
Blinking
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Slow blinking
Off
Off
Off
Description and action if needed
Drive is present with power.
Drive is present with power and is being accessed.
Drive CAN be replaced. Steady yellow fault light
indicates drive has a problem. Power to drive is off.
Drive SHOULD NOT be replaced at this time. A
slowly blinking yellow fault light indicates that a drive
that has just been replaced is in recovery mode
(drive array being rebuilt). Power to drive is on.
There is no drive installed in the bay.
*
The hot-swap controller is responsible for turning the yellow drive fault LED on or off according to the states specified
by commands received via SAF-TE and IMB.
See Figures 10-3 and 10-4.
1. Look at the yellow LEDs below the hot-docking bays to determine which drive is bad.
2. Push on the drive carrier latch of the bad drive, and while grasping the handle, pull the
assembly toward you to disengage the drive from the backplane connector.
3. Carefully slide the assembly out of the bay, and place it on an antistatic surface.
4. Orient the new carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-docking bay guide rails so that
metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make sure
you correctly place the carrier into the guide rails to avoid damage.
5. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the
driver carrier latches.
CAUTION
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push
the assembly into the bay. Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of
the bracket.
106
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping
ABC
OM07345
Figure 10-4. Hot-swap SCSI Drive Indicators
A.
B.
C.
Green LED, drive power
Green LED, drive activity
Yellow LED, drive fault
W page should be blank
107
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot
Swapping
This chapter tells how to hot-swap a server power supply.
When the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which
power supply is defective by checking the three status LEDs on the back of each power supply. If
a power supply fails, the yellow FAIL LED on the back of the power supply will be on
continuously. You may hot-swap the power supply—remove and replace it—with a good one. If
the server contains three power supplies, you do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a
failed power supply.
The LEDs on the power supply are:
•
Green PWR (Power) LED—when blinking, AC is applied to the power supply and standby
voltages are available. When on continuously, all power outputs are ready.
Yellow FAIL(Power Supply Failure) LED—when on continuously, the power supply has
failed and it may be replaced.
Yellow PRFL (Predictive Failure) LED—when blinking, the power supply is about to fail in
the near future due to the fan performing poorly. The LED latches into a blinking state once
the predictive failure condition occurs.
•
•
Power Supply LEDs
Power Supply Status
PWR (power)
FAIL (power supply failure)
PRFL (predictive failure)
(Green)
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
No AC power
Off
Off
Off
AC in/standby outputs on
Blinking
Off
Off
DC outputs on and okay
On
Off
Off
Power supply failure
Off
On
Off
Current limit
On
Blinking/None Latch
Off
Predictive failure
On
Off
Blinking/Latched
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
109
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Hot Swapping a Power Supply
In a fully configured server, the power system contains three 750 watt auto-ranging power
supplies; one of the power supplies is redundant. If a single power supply fails in the redundant
power system, the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on. You can easily
hot-swap the defective power supply without turning the server power off.
Power supplies are hot-swappable only in configurations with three power supplies.
WARNING
Because of chassis airflow disruption, the power supply bay should not
be vacant for more than two minutes when server power is on.
Exceeding the two-minute limit may cause damage to certain peripheral
components.
Before replacing a power supply in a two-power supply configuration,
you must turn off power to the server.
A filler panel is required in a two-power supply configuration. The
filler panel must be installed within two minutes when moving from a
three-power supply configuration to a two-power supply configuration.
✏
NOTE
If the system contains less that two power supplies or AC is not present in at
least two power supplies and midplane jumper JP1 is removed, the system
will automatically shutdown.
In a three-power supply configuration a power supply can be swapped at any
time.
Removing a Power Supply
CAUTION
If the chassis contains only two power supplies, turn off all peripheral
devices connected to the server. Then turn off the server power with the
push-button on/off switch on the front panel.
See Figures 11-1.
1. Look at the yellow FAIL LEDs on the power supplies to determine which one is defective.
2. Pull the power supply handle down to unlock it from the chassis.
3. Pull the power supply toward you to unplug it.
4. Remove the defective power supply, and set it aside.
110
Chapter 11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping
B
A
OM07324
Figure 11-1. Removing a Power Supply
A.
B.
Pull down handle
Remove power supply
111
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Replacing a Power Supply
See Figure 11-1.
1. Remove the new power supply from the protective packaging.
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the power supply in your equipment log.
3. Slide the replacement power supply into the power supply cavity with the handle out.
4. After the power supply contacts the midplane, lift the power supply handle to lock it into
place.
White text
112
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide
Safety Guidelines
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
A Regulatory Specifications
B Equipment Log
C Warnings
113
Safety Guidelines
BEFORE YOU REMOVE SERVER COVERS, OBSERVE THESE GUIDELINES:
1. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server.
2. Turn off DC power in the server by pressing the push-button on/off power switch on the front
panel of the server.
3. Disconnect AC power to the server by unplugging the alternating current (AC) power cord
from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.
4. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I/O panel on the back of the server.
5. Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap
attached to chassis ground of the server—any unpainted metal surface—when handling
components.
Warnings and Cautions
These warnings and cautions apply whenever you remove the top and side covers of the server to
access components inside it. Integration of the server should be done only by technically qualified
personnel.
Server Precautions
WARNING
Server power on/off: The push-button on/off power switch on the front
panel of the server does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC
power from the server, you must unplug the AC power cord from the
AC inlet filter.
Hazardous conditions, power supply and power distribution backplane:
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside the
power supply and the power distribution backplane. There are no userserviceable parts inside them; servicing should be done only by
technically qualified personnel.
Hazardous conditions, devices and cables: Hazardous electrical
conditions may be present on power, telephone, and communication
cables. Turn off the server and disconnect telecommunications systems,
networks, modems, and each power cord attached to the server before
opening it. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage can result.
Avoid injury: The minimum server configuration weighs 51.4 kg
(113 lbs), and the maximum one weighs 60 kg (132 lbs). To avoid injury,
we recommend that a lift be used to insert the server into the slide
assemblies in the equipment rack.
115
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) and ESD protection: ESD can damage
disk drives, add-in boards, and other components. This server can withstand
normal levels of environmental ESD while you are hot-swapping hard disk
drives and power supplies. However, we recommend doing all procedures
in this manual only at an ESD workstation. If one is not available, you can
provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to
chassis ground of the server—any unpainted metal surface—when handling
components.
Handling boards and modules: Boards and modules can be extremely
sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling. After removing a
board or module from a protective wrapper or from the server, place the
board or module component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.
If you place the I/O baseboard on a conductive surface, the back-up battery
leads may short out. If they do, this will result in a loss of CMOS data and
will drain the battery. Do not slide a board or module over any surface.
Cooling and airflow: Operating the server with the top and side covers
removed can damage the components inside it. For proper cooling and
airflow, always replace the covers and air baffles before turning on the
server.
Back-up battery: Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. Discard the used battery according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Equipment Rack Precautions
WARNING
Anchor the equipment rack: The equipment rack must be anchored to
an unmovable support to prevent it from falling over when one or more
servers are extended in front of it on slide assemblies. The anchors must
be able to withstand a force of up to 113 kg (250 lbs). You must also
consider the weight of any other device installed in the rack.
Main AC power disconnect: You are responsible for installing an AC
power disconnect for the entire rack unit. This main disconnect must be
readily accessible, and it must be labeled as controlling power to the
entire unit, not just to the server(s).
116
Safety Guidelines
Grounding the rack installation: To avoid the potential for an electrical
shock hazard, you must include a third wire safety grounding conductor
with the rack installation. If the server power cord is plugged into an
AC outlet that is part of the rack, then you must provide proper
grounding for the rack itself. If the server power cord is plugged into a
wall AC outlet, the safety grounding conductor in the power cord
provides proper grounding only for the server. You must provide
additional, proper grounding for the rack and other devices installed
in it.
Overcurrent protection: The server is designed for an AC line voltage
source with up to 20 amperes of overcurrent protection. If the power
system for the equipment rack is installed on a branch circuit with more
than 20 amperes of protection, you must provide supplemental
protection for the server. If more than one server is installed in the
rack, the power source for each server must be from a separate branch
circuit. The overall current rating of a server configured with three
power supplies is under 12 amperes.
CAUTION
Temperature: The operating temperature of the server, when installed in an
equipment rack, must not go below 5 °C (41 °F) or rise above 35 °C (95 °F).
Extreme fluctuations in temperature can cause a variety of problems in your
server.
Ventilation: The equipment rack must provide sufficient airflow to the
front of the server to maintain proper cooling. It must also include
ventilation sufficient to exhaust a maximum of 3,150 Btu's per hour for the
server. The rack selected and the ventilation provided must be suitable to
the environment in which the server will be used.
117
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall the server covers.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)
Small flat-bladed screwdriver
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
Covers
See Figures 12-1 and Figure 12-2 The server comes with several removable covers:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The plastic snap-on front bezel provides user friendly system controls and indicators.
The plastic snap-on peripheral bay cover provides access to the peripheral bay. You must
remove the front bezel before you can remove this cover.
The top cover provides access to the CPU baseboard, I/O baseboard, and PCI bus regular slot
cover. You must remove the top cover before you can remove the PCI bus regular slot cover.
The PCI bus hot-plug cover provides assess to the PCI bus hot-plug slots.
The fan array cover provides access to the 6-fan array. It can be opened without removing the
top cover.
The memory module cover provides access to the two memory modules.
CAUTION
For proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server with the covers
removed. Always reinstall them before turning on the server.
119
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
D
C
B
A
OM07302
Figure 12-1. Server Covers
A. Memory module cover
B. Fan array cover
C. Top cover
D. PCI hot-plug cover
Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover
The peripheral bay cover is attached to the chassis with press-in rivets and spring clips. See
Figure 12-2.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Grasp the peripheral bay cover handle and pull.
3. Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched.
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Cover
See Figure 12-2.
1. Position the peripheral bay cover in position and press into place.
120
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
B
A
OM07356
Figure 12-2. Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel
A.
B.
Plastic snap-on Peripheral Bay Cover
Plastic snap-on Front Bezel
Removing the Front Bezel
The plastic front bezel is attached to the chassis with press-in rivets and spring clips in the same
manner as the peripheral bay cover.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the peripheral bay cover as described earlier.
3. Grasp the bezel hand and pull.
4. Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched.
Reinstalling the Front Bezel
1. Install the peripheral bay cover as described earlier.
2. Position the front bezel in position and press into place.
Removing the Top Cover
See Figures 12-3 and 12-4.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server.
3. Turn the server off with the push-button on/off power switch on the front panel.
4. Unplug the AC power cord from the power inlet receptacle, or from the power source outlet.
5. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I/O panel on the back of the server.
121
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
6. Remove and save the screws that attach the top cover to the chassis.
✏
NOTE
It is not necessary to remove the PCI bus hot-plug cover.
7. While facing the back of the server, pull hard on the front edge of the cover to disengage the
tabs along the sides of the cover from the slots in the chassis slide.
8. Slide the cover backward about an inch, and lift it straight up. Set the cover aside.
9. Lift PCI bus regular expansion slot cover from chassis.
A
OM07303
Figure 12-3. Top Cover
C.
122
Two screws
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
OM07305
Figure 12-4. PCI Regular Slot Cover
A.
Two screws
Reinstalling the Top Cover
See Figures 12-3 and 12-4.
1. Reinstall the PCI bus regular expansion slot cover.
2. While facing the back of the server, position the top cover over the chassis so that the tabs
along the edges of the cover align with the slots in the top edge of the chassis.
3. Gently lower the cover straight down on top of the server. Then place your hands on the outer
surface of the cover, opposite each other, and push the cover forward to seat it.
4. Attach the cover to the chassis with the two screws, and tighten them firmly (6.0 inch-pounds).
5. Connect all external cables and power cords to the server.
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover
See Figure 12-5.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove and save the screws that attach the PCI bus hot-plug cover to the chassis.
3. While facing the back of the server, pull on the front edge of the cover to disengage the tabs
along the front of the cover from the top cover.
4. Remove the cover and set it aside.
123
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
A
OM07357
Figure 12-5. PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover
Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover
See Figure 12-5.
1. Ensure that add-in boards are firmly seated in their respective slots.
2. Position the cover over the top cover so that the tabs along its edges align with the slots in the
top cover.
3. Lower the cover until it rests on the top cover.
4. Push the cover toward the server front to seat the tabs along the cover front with the top cover.
5. Attach the cover to the top cover with the two screws, and tighten them firmly
(6.0 inch-pounds).
124
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling
Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
Remove the front bezel as described earlier.
Remove the top cover as described earlier.
Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array assembly cover to the chassis.
Slide the cover forward to free it from the securing tab.
Remove the cover.
Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Place cover in position over the fan array. Ensure that the tabs interlock with the fan array
assembly.
3. Lower cover and slide it to the rear so that it engages locking tabs.
4. Secure the cover screw removed earlier.
5. Reinstall the top cover as described earlier.
6. Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier.
Removing the Memory Module Cover
See Figure 12-6.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the front bezel as described earlier.
3. Loosen the four captive screws securing the memory module cover and remove the cover.
125
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
OM07353
Figure 12-6. Memory Module Cover
Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover
See Figure 12-6.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Place the cover in position and tighten the four captive screws to secure the cover.
3. Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier.
126
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall major server components. Because the CPU
baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis and the PHP I/O baseboard is
mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis, the procedures start with the covers and end
up with the baseboards.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)
•
Small flat-bladed screwdriver
•
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
•
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
127
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Fan Array Housing
Removing the Fan Array Housing
See Figures 13-1 and 13-2.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover, the fan array assembly cover, and the memory module cover as
described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Use the grasp holes and remove all fan assemblies.
4. Remove and save the five screws that secure the housing to the chassis.
5. Remove the fan array housing.
Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing
See Figures 13-1 and 13-2.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Reinstall the fan array housing ensuring that it engages with the support tabs.
3. Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws firmly (8.0-inch pounds).
4. Reinstall each fan assembly. The fan assemblies are keyed and can only be installed if
correctly oriented.
5. Reinstall the top cover, the fan array assembly cover, and the memory module cover as
described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling."
128
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
A
B
OM07304
Figure 13-1. Fan Removal
129
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
B
A
A
A
OM07308
Figure 13-2. Fan Array Housing
A.
B.
130
Screws (five)
Fan array housing
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
LCD Module
The LCD module displays server information.
Removing the LCD Module
See Figure 13-3.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the two screws that secure the LCD module to the chassis.
4. Disconnect the LCD module data and power cables from the front panel board and set the LCD
module aside.
Reinstalling the LCD Module
See Figure 13-3.
1. Connect the LCD module data and power cables to the front panel board.
✏
NOTE
Verify that both cables are below the sheet of insulating material above the
front panel board.
2. Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws.
3. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
131
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
OM07358
Figure 13-3. LCD Module
Memory Modules
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the memory module DIMM sockets, do not attempt to
use the metal stiffener on the memory module as a handle.
Removing a Memory Module
See Figure 13-4.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the memory module outward about 90° to
disengage the pin-and-socket connector of the module from the pin-and-socket connector of
the midplane.
4. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, slide it out of the slot
guides. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in
an antistatic protective wrapper.
132
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Reinstalling a Memory Module
See Figure 13-4.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, remove it from its
protective wrapper. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.
3. Record the serial number of the memory module in your equipment log.
4. Remove any installed DIMM from the removed memory module and reinstall them in the
replacement memory module.
✏
NOTE
The memory module installs DIMM-side down.
5. Grasp the memory module by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides
until the levers engage with the flanges in front of the guides.
6. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat
the pin-and-socket connector of the module into the pin-and-socket connector of the midplane.
7. If you removed the LCD module, reinstall it as described earlier.
8. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12.
133
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
OM07361
Figure 13-4. Memory Module
134
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Front Side Bus Terminator Module
The CPU baseboard provides four slot 2 connectors for processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges.
If any slot 2 connector is depopulated, a terminator module must be installed in the connector to
properly terminate the signals on the front side bus (FSB). For example, if only two slots are
populated with processors, you need FSB terminator modules in the two unpopulated processor
slots. The terminator modules are housed in plastic covers.
Removing a Terminator Module
See Figure 13-5.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket.
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the terminator module outward to eject the
module out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.
5. Slide the module out of the slot guides, and place it component-side down on a nonconductive,
static-free surface.
Reinstalling a Terminator Module
See Figure 13-5.
1. Grasp the terminator module by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides
until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides.
2. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat
the module into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.
3. Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide.
4. Tighten the captive screw.
5. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.
135
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
OM07306
Figure 13-5. Removing a Holddown
136
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Processor
The CPU baseboard supports up to four processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges.
CAUTION
The processors can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful
handling. After removing a processor from a protective wrapper or from the
CPU baseboard, place it on a nonconductive, static-free surface. Do not
slide the processor over any surface.
Removing a Processor
See Figures 13-5.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket.
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the processor cartridge outward to eject the
cartridge out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.
5. Slide the cartridge out of the slot guides, and place it heat sink-side up on a nonconductive,
static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper.
CAUTION
If a slot 2 connector is depopulated, a terminator module must be installed in
the connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB.
Installing a Processor
See Figures 13-5.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the processor cartridge or terminator module as described earlier.
4. Being careful not to touch the gold edge connector on the processor cartridge, remove it from
the protective wrapper. Place the cartridge heat sink-side up on a nonconductive, static-free
surface.
5. Record the serial number of the cartridge in your equipment log.
6. Grasp the cartridge by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the
levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides.
7. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the cartridge to
seat the cartridge into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.
8. Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide.
9. Tighten the captive screw.
10. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.
137
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
DC to DC Converter VRM
VRM in connector
Provides power for
Description
J1
Processor #1
Processor core power only
J2
Processor #1 and #2
L2 Cache power only
J3
Processor #2
Processor core power only
J4
Processor #3
Processor core power only
J5
Processor #3 and #4
L2 Cache power only
J6
Processor #4
Processor core power only
Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM
See Figure 13-6.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, push the plastic ejector levers on each end of the
connector away from the VRM to eject it out of the connector.
4. Place the VRM on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM
See Figure 13-6.
1. Remove the DC to DC converter VRM from the antistatic package.
2. Carefully insert the VRM in the connector on the CPU baseboard. Make sure you do not bend
the connector pins.
3. Push down firmly on each end of the VRM until the ejector levers of the connector snap into
place, locking the VRM in the connector.
4. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.
138
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
F
E
D
A
G
B
C
J
I
H
OM07318
Figure 13-6. DC to DC Converter VRM
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
VRM socket
DC to DC Converter VRM
Ejector lever
J1, VRM connector
J3, VRM connector
J2, VRM connector
J5, VRM connector
J6, VRM connector
J4, VRM connector
CPU Baseboard
139
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CPU Tray
The CPU tray provides rigid mounting for the front panel board, the CPU baseboard, and the
memory modules. It also facilitates mating with the midplane.
Removing the CPU Tray
See Figure 13-7.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove all terminator and processor modules as described earlier.
4. Remove the LCD module as described earlier.
5. Remove the memory modules as described earlier.
6. Remove the fan array housing as described earlier.
7. Remove six screws that secure the tray to the chassis.
8. Simultaneously pull the eject/insert levers down to eject the tray out of the midplane.
9. Slide the tray from the chassis.
Reinstalling the CPU Tray
See Figure 13-7 and 13-8.
1. Carefully position the tray on the guide rails and slide the tray into the chassis.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch the cables coming from the peripheral bay when
reinstalling the tray.
2. Simultaneously lift the eject/insert levers to mate the tray grand connector with the midplane
grand connector. Ensure that the lower tray guide engages with the tray support attached to the
peripheral bay. Be sure CPU support rail engages rear support.
3. Reinstall the six screws that secure the tray to the chassis.
4. Reinstall all terminator and processor modules as described earlier.
5. Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.
6. Reinstall the memory modules as described earlier.
7. Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier
8. Reinstall the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
140
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
E
D
C
A
C
B
B
F
OM07327
Figure 13-7. CPU Tray
A. Rear support
B. Eject/Insert levers
C. Screws (six)
D. Midplane
E. Grand connector
F. Front panel board
141
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
A
B
OM07328
Figure 13-8. CPU Tray Support Rail
Front Panel Board
The front panel board contains the server controls and indicators. It is mounted on snap-on and
threaded standoffs on the CPU Tray (see Figure 13-7).
Removing the Front Panel Board
See Figure 13-9.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.
3. Remove the insulating material from the front panel board.
4. Remove the nine screws, and remove the board.
142
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
CAUTION
When the front panel board is free of the CPU board connector, its switches
are surrounded by sheet metal. Be careful not to damage these switches
when lifting the front panel board.
5. Push/pull the front panel board horizontally to free it from the CPU baseboard connector and
lift the board from the chassis.
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the Front Panel Board
See Figure 13-9.
CAUTION
When positioning the front panel board for reinstallation be sure its switches
are in the sheet metal holes before mating its connector with the CPU
baseboard. If the switches are not in the holes they may be damaged.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Position the front panel board over threaded standoffs on the chassis.
Push the board horizontally to mate the connector with the CPU baseboard connector.
Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs.
Make sure the board is properly positioned, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).
Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.
Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier.
Reinstall the insulating material removed earlier from the front panel board.
Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.
Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.
A
B
C
OM07322
Figure 13-9. Front Panel Board
A.
B.
C.
CPU baseboard connector
LCD data connector
LCD power connector
143
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CPU Baseboard
Removing the CPU Baseboard
See Figure 13-10.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.
3. Remove the front panel board as described earlier.
4. Remove the terminator modules as described earlier.
5. Remove the processors as described earlier.
6. Remove the screws in the base of the processor retention module.
7. Remove the module—it comes out as one unit—and set it aside.
8. Remove the DC to DC converters as described earlier.
9. Lift the baseboard to unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.
10. Place the baseboard on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic
protective wrapper.
Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard
See Figure 13-10.
1. Remove CPU baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
2. Position the baseboard over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the CPU tray.
3. Press the baseboard onto the snap-on standoffs, and insert the screws loosely into the threaded
standoffs.
4. Position the processor retention module over the CPU baseboard and loosely insert the
retaining screws into the threaded standoffs.
5. Make sure the baseboard is properly seated, and then tighten all screws to 8.0 inch-pounds.
6. Reinstall the processors and any terminator modules as described earlier.
7. Reinstall DC to DC converters as described earlier.
8. Reinstall the front panel board as described earlier.
9. Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.
144
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
=A
=B
OM07321
Figure 13-10. CPU Baseboard
A.
B.
Standoff (six)
Screw (twelve)
145
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Add-in Boards
The PHP I/O baseboard provides 10 PCI bus master slots and one ISA bus master slot. They
accept any add-in PCI and ISA boards or any add-in board that is compatible with an IBM PC AT†
or PC XT† system (except for an 8-bit drop card that fits only in an 8-bit PC XT connector). One
PCI slot shares a common chassis I/O expansion slot with the ISA slot; you can use the slot for
either PCI or the ISA, but not both.
CAUTION
Some accessory/option card outputs may exceed Class 2 or limited power
source limits and must use appropriate interconnecting cabling in
accordance with the National Electric Code during installation.
Do not overload the PHP I/O baseboard by installing add-in boards that draw
excessive current. For expansion slot current limitations, see Chapter 20,
“Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage.”
Add-in boards can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful
handling. After removing the board from the protective wrapper or from the
baseboard, place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free
surface. Do not slide the board over any surface.
✏
NOTE
If you are installing or removing an ISA add-in board , you must run the
SSU to reconfigure the server. Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add-in
board.
Installing an Add-in Board
See Figures 13-11, 13-12, and 13-13.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
✏
NOTE
The 64-bit PCI hot swap expansion slots also have a power enabling switch
actuator. This actuator must be installed (unless override is set in the BIOS
setup or an expansion board is installed). The actuator is held in place by the
expansion slot cover screw.
3. Select the appropriate 16-bit ISA, 32-bit PCI, or 64-bit PCI expansion slot. Remove and save
the expansion slot cover and, if installed, the power enabling switch actuator.
146
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
A
B
C
OM07319
Figure 13-11. PHP I/O Baseboard Expansion Slots
A.
B.
C.
16-bit ISA slot
32-bit PCI slots
64-bit hot swap PCI slots
OM07337
Figure 13-12. Expansion Slot Cover
147
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
5. Being careful not to touch the components or gold edge connectors on the add-in board,
remove it from the protective wrapper, and place it component-side up on a nonconductive,
antistatic surface.
6. Record the serial number of the board in your equipment log.
7. Set any jumpers or switches according to the board manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and firmly press it into an expansion slot on
the PHP I/O baseboard (Figures 13-13). The tapered foot of the board retaining bracket must
fit into the mating slot in the expansion slot frame.
9. Secure the add-in board to the expansion slot frame using the expansion slot cover retaining
screw.
10. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.
11. If you installed an ISA add-in board, run the SSU to reconfigure the server. Running the SSU
is optional for a PCI add-in board. For information about running this utility, see Chapter 5,
“System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
A
B
C
OM07331
Figure 13-13. Installing an Add-in Board
A.
B.
C.
148
16-bit ISA slot (ISA board component-side up)
32-bit PCI slot (PCI board, component-side down)
64-bit hot swap PCI slot (PCI board, component-side down)
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Removing an Add-in Board
CAUTION
Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots to maintain the
electromagnetic emission characteristics of the server and to ensure proper
cooling of the server components.
See Figures 13-11, 13-12, and 13-13.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Disconnect any cables attached to the board you are removing.
4. Remove and retain the screw securing the add-in board to the expansion slot frame.
5. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and carefully pull it toward you until the
edge connector of the board pulls free from the connector on the PHP I/O baseboard. Make
sure that you do not scrape the board against other components.
6. Store the board in an antistatic protective wrapper.
7. Install an expansion slot cover (Figure 13-12) over the vacant slot. The tapered foot of the
cover must fit into the mating slot in the bottom of the expansion slot frame.
8. If this is a 64-bit hot swap slot, install the power enabling switch actuator over the vacant slot.
The spring at the end of the actuator rests on the power enabling switch.
9. Secure the expansion slot cover and the actuator to the expansion slot frame using the
expansion slot cover retaining screw.
10. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.
11. If you removed an ISA add-in board, run the SSU to configure the system. For information
about running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
149
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
I/O Riser Card
Removing the I/O Riser Card
See Figure 13-14.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Disconnect the Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) signal cable from J1 on the I/O
riser card.
4. Remove and save the screw.
5. Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners, carefully pull it toward you until the edge
connector of the card pulls free from its connector J2A1 on the PHP I/O baseboard. Make sure
that you do not scrape the card against other components.
6. Place the card on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the I/O Riser Card
See Figure 13-14.
1. Remove the I/O riser card from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
2. Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners, carefully insert the edge connector of the
card into connector J2A1 on the PHP I/O baseboard. Press the card firmly into the connector.
3. Insert the screw you removed earlier in the threaded hole in the chassis. Tighten the screw
firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).
4. Connect the ICMB signal cable to J1 on the riser card.
5. Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.
150
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
B
A
C
OM07323
Figure 13-14. I/O Riser Card
A.
B.
C.
J1B1, I/O connector
Screw
ICMB signal cable
151
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
I/O Tray
The I/O Tray provides rigid mounting for the PHP I/O baseboard and facilitates mating with the
midplane.
Removing the I/O Tray
See Figure 13-15.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the add-in boards installed in the
expansion slots.
4. Remove the add-in boards as described earlier. This step is not required unless replacing the
PHP I/O baseboard.
5. Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the PHP I/O baseboard.
6. Remove the three screws securing the tray to the chassis.
10. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers to eject the tray out of the midplane.
7. Lift the tray from the chassis.
Reinstalling the I/O Tray
See Figure 13-15.
1. Position the tray over the chassis and lower it on to its supports.
2. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers into the locked position. This action also mates the
PHP I/O baseboard connector with the midplane connector.
3. Reinstall the three securing screws.
4. Connect all internal cables to the PHP I/O baseboard.
5. Reinstall all add-in boards, if removed, as described earlier.
6. Connect all internal cables connected to the add-in boards installed in the expansion slots.
7. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
152
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
C
A
B
B
A
OM07310
Figure 13-15. I/O Tray
A. Screws (three)
B. Eject/insert levers
C. I/O Tray
153
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board
Removing the ICMB Board
See Figure 13-16.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from connector J1 on the I/O riser card.
4. Remove and save the screw that attach the ICMB board to the I/O Tray.
5. Push on the tab of the snap-on standoff and pull the board toward you to remove it from the
snap-on standoff.
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the ICMB Board
See Figure 13-16.
1. Remove the ICMB board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
2. Position the board over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the I/O Tray.
3. Press the board onto the snap-on standoff, and insert the screw loosely into the threaded
standoffs.
4. Make sure the board is properly aligned, and tighten the screw firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).
5. Connect the signal cable to connector J1 on the I/O riser card.
6. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.
154
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
OM07354
Figure 13-16. ICMB Board
155
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
PHP I/O Baseboard
CAUTION
The PHP I/O baseboard can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always
requires careful handling. After removing the baseboard from the server,
place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface to prevent
shorting out the battery leads. If you place the baseboard on a conductive
surface, the back-up battery leads may short out. If they do, this will result
in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery. Do not slide the
baseboard over any surface.
Removing the PHP I/O Baseboard
See Figure 13-17.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.
4. Remove the I/O riser card as described earlier.
5. Remove the ICMB board as described earlier.
6. Remove all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers.
7. Remove the add-in boards as described earlier.
8. Remove the plastic divider and base.
9. Remove and save the screws that attach the PHP I/O baseboard to the tray.
10. Pull the board toward you to unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.
11. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the PHP I/O Baseboard
See Figure 13-17.
1. Remove the PHP I/O baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
2. Position the baseboard over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the
chassis.
3. Press the baseboard onto the snap-on standoffs and install the plastic divider and base.
4. Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs.
5. Make sure the baseboard is properly seated, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).
6. Reinstall the I/O board as described earlier.
7. Reinstall the I/O riser card.
8. Reinstall the ICMB board as described earlier.
9. Connect all internal cables to the PHP I/O baseboard.
10. Reinstall the add-in boards in their original expansion slots as described earlier.
11. Connect all internal cables that go to the add-in boards installed in the expansion slots.
156
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
12. Reinstall all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers in their original
positions.
13. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.
14. Connect all peripheral device cables that go to the I/O panel on the rear of the system.
15. Run the SSU, and use the saved configuration file to restore all options to the same settings.
For information about running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to
Run.”
=A
=B
OM07317
Figure 13-17. PHP I/O Baseboard
A.
B.
Snap-on standoffs (two)
Screws (thirteen)
157
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
MidPlane
Removing the Midplane
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.
4. Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.
5. Remove three screws holding the upper midplane support bracket and remove the bracket.
6. Remove four screws holding the midplane support bracket to the chassis and remove the
bracket.
7. Remove and save the screws that attach the midplane to its support bracket and remove the
midplane.
8. Place the midplane on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the Midplane
1. Remove the midplane from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
2. Position the midplane on its support bracket and insert the screws loosely into the threaded
standoffs.
3. Make sure the midplane is properly positioned, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inchpounds).
4. Reinstall the midplane and its support bracket in the chassis.
5. Reinstall the upper midplane support bracket.
6. Reinstall the I/O Tray as described earlier.
7. Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier.
8. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
AC Filter and Cable
Removing the AC Filter and Cable
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
158
Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.
Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.
Remove and save the screws that attaches the AC filter tray to the chassis.
Remove and save the screws that attaches the three AC plugs to the chassis.
Remove the three plug retaining brackets.
Remove the AC filter and cable.
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the AC filter and cable from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
Lay the cable in position inside the chassis.
Reinstall the three plug retaining brackets and secure with screws.
Reinstall the AC filter tray.
Reinstall the I/O Tray as described earlier.
Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier.
Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
Peripheral Bay
Removing the Peripheral Bay
See Figure 13-18
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove and save the four screws that secure the peripheral bay to the chassis.
4. Grab the CPU baseboard tray support and pull the peripheral bay from the chassis.
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay
See Figure 13-18
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Place the peripheral bay into position and push into place using the CPU baseboard tray
support.
3. Ensure that the CPU baseboard tray support engages with the CPU baseboard tray.
4. Install the four securing screws removed earlier.
5. Reinstall the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
159
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
OM07350
Figure 13-18. Peripheral Bay
Peripheral Bay Backplane
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane
See Figure 13-19.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove Peripheral Bay as described earlier.
4. Tag and disconnect power and signal cable to the diskette drive and CD-ROM drive.
5. Remove and save eight securing screws and remove backplane from peripheral bay.
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
160
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane
See Figure 13-19.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
3. Position and align the board over the two alignment pins.
4. Reinstall the eight securing screws removed earlier.
5. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier.
=A
=B
OM07355
Figure 13-19. Peripheral Bay Backplane
A.
B.
Snap-on standoffs (two)
Screws (eight)
161
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
Remove the fan array housing as described earlier.
Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.
Remove the peripheral bay as described earlier.
Tag and disconnect all cables to the board.
Remove and save the screws that attached the board to the chassis and remove the board.
Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
162
Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.
Attach the board to chassis.
Connect all cables.
Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier.
Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.
Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.
Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling
A
OM07342
Figure 13-20. Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board
A.
Screw (four)
This page is blank
163
14 Removable Media Drives:
Installing/Removing/Replacing
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall removable media drives.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)
Small flat-bladed screwdriver
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
Diskette Drive
The 3.5-inch diskette drive in the 3.5-inch user-accessible drive bay supports 720 KB, 1.25 MB,
1.44 MB, and 2.88 MB media. Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved
add-in devices.
165
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Removing the Diskette Drive
See Figure 14-1.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the 3.5-inch diskette drive.
4. Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to the 3.5-inch drive bay to the peripheral
bay.
5. Pull the diskette drive and tray from the peripheral bay.
6. Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to its support tray and place it
component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective
wrapper.
Replacing the Diskette Drive
See Figure 14-1.
1. Remove the 3.5-inch diskette drive from the protective packaging, and place it component-side
up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.
3. Set any jumpers or switches according to the drive manufacturer's instructions.
4. Install diskette drive in its support tray using the screws removed earlier.
5. Slide the drive into the 3.5-inch diskette drive bay until it stops.
6. Connect the power and signal cables.
7. Secure the drive to the bay with the screw you removed earlier.
8. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling”.
9. Run the SSU to specify that the diskette drive is installed in the server. For information about
running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
166
Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing
B
A
OM07360
Figure 14-1. Diskette Drive
A.
Screw (one)
167
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CD-ROM Drive
The server comes with an CD-ROM drive installed in the peripheral bay. Contact your sales
representative or dealer for a list of approved add-in devices.
Removing the CD-ROM Drive
See Figures 14-2, and 14-3.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Disconnect the power and the signal cables from the CD-ROM drive.
4. Squeeze the tabs on the plastic snap-in slide rails toward the drive to release it. Pull the drive
out of the bay until you can access its power and signal cables.
5. Remove and save the four screws and the two snap-in slide rails from the drive.
168
Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing
D
B
A
E
C
OM07359
Figure 14-2. CD-ROM Drive
A. CD-ROM Drive
B. Plastic snap-in slide rail
C. Tab
D. Power cable
E. Signal cable
169
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
D
B
A
C
OM06742
Figure 14-3. Snap-in Plastic Slide Rails
A. CD-ROM drive
B. Tab
C. Screw
D. Slide rail
Replacing the CD-ROM Drive
See Figures 14-2, and 14-3.
1. Remove the CD-ROM drive from the protective packaging, and place it on an antistatic
surface.
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.
3. Set any jumpers and switches on the drive according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Using two screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach each plastic slide rail
to the drive.
5. Orient the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails and push the drive into the
bay until the slide rails lock in place.
6. Connect the power signal cables to the drive.
7. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling”
8. This step is optional. Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the CD-ROM drive is the boot
device. For information about running these utilities, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility:
When to Run,” and Chapter 4, “Setup Utility: When to Run.”
170
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
This chapter describes the midplane.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Midplane Features
The midplane distributes the power load—CPU and PHP I/O baseboards, memory modules,
peripheral bays, and hot-swap hard disk backplane—among two or three 750 watt autoranging
power supplies. It also provides a bus interface for the CPU and PHP I/O baseboards, memory
modules, and the hot-swap hard disk backplane. The midplane provides the following voltages
and maximum currents:
Voltage
Maximum Current
+12 V
56 A
+5 V
68 A
+3.3 V
61 A
5 V standby
1A
-12 V
1A
+24 V Bias
100 mA
I2C Bus
The private I2C bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server. The 5 V standby
voltage provides power for the bus, and it is available even when the server power is off.
171
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Detection Signals
Signal Name
Description
Present
When the presence detect line is low, the power supply is present.
AC OK
When the power-good signal on the midplane goes high, it signifies that all power
supply voltages are available and stable.
Predictive Failure
The predictive failure signal from the power supply alerts the front panel controller
(FPC) in case the supply is likely to fail because of a poorly performing fan—running
at a slower RPM than normal. When the signal goes high, the FPC warns the user
about the upcoming failure but it does not shut down the power supply.
Fault
When the fault signal from the power supply goes low, it indicates that the power
supply has failed. To clear the fault, you must remove and reapply AC power to the
power supply.
Power On
When the power-on signal on the midplane goes high, the power supplies power up
if there is no 240 VA shutdown condition.
5 V Quick Discharge
The quick discharge circuit speeds up discharging the 5 V bus after power is turned off. The
circuit starts discharging the bus as the voltage drops to around 1 V.
172
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
Midplane Connectors
A
B
C
D
OM07339
Figure 15-1. Midplane
A.
B.
C.
D.
Grand connector
Memory module connector (J6)
Peripheral power connector (J11)
Memory module connector (J7)
173
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Grand Connector
Pins on this connector extend through the midplane and connect with both the CPU baseboard and
the PHP I/O baseboard.
F16 and Front Panel Connector, J3
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
COM2_TO_FP_EN
GROUND
GROUND
COM2_TO_SIO_EN
PIC_CLK
IO_TCK
XIMB_SOUT_EN
SIN_TTL_COM2
STPCLK_L
GROUND
3
IO_TDO
GROUND
IO_TMS
IO_TRST_L
PICD(1)
4
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)
IO_TDI
PWRGDB
PICD(0)
GROUND
5
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)
GROUND
A20M_L
INIT_L
unused
6
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)
CPU_SPI_RESET_L
PROC_RESET_L
GROUND
GROUND
7
I2C_BMC_SCL
GROUND
GROUND
BMC_SPI_BUS(2)
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)
8
I2C_BMC_SDA
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)
GROUND
GROUND
9
NMI_5V
GROUND
SMI_L
X0IB_L
CIB_INT(0)
10
GROUND
IGNNE_L
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA
IO_PWRGD
GROUND
11
X0D_L(0)
GROUND
GROUND
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL
INTR
12
X0D_L(1)
X0XRTS_L
X0HRTS_L
GROUND
GROUND
13
X0D_L(3)
GROUND
GROUND
DSEL0_L
FERR_L
14
X0D_L(4)
X0D_L(2)
X0BE_L(0)
GROUND
GROUND
15
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
DCMPLTA_L
X0BLK_L
16
X0D_L(6)
X0D_L(5)
X0PAR_L
GROUND
GROUND
17
X0D_L(8)
GROUND
GROUND
SIN_TTL_XIMB
X0RST_L
18
X0D_L(9)
X0D_L(7)
X0ADS_L
GROUND
GROUND
19
GROUND
GROUND
X0D_L(11)
SOUT_TTL_COM2
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
20
X0D_L(12)
X0D_L(10)
X0BE_L(1)
GROUND
DCD_TTL_FP
21
X0D_L(14)
GROUND
X0XSTBN_L
X0XSTBP_L
GROUND
22
X0D_L(15)
X0D_L(13)
GROUND
GROUND
WDEVT_L
23
GROUND
GROUND
DOFF0_L
X0HSTBP_L
GROUND
24
X0CLK
GROUND
GROUND
X0HSTBN_L
DCMPLTB_L
25
GROUND
DVALIDA_L
DSR_TTL_FP
ISP_MODE
ISP_EN_L
26
CTS_TTL_FP
DOFF1_L
GROUND
ISP_SCLK
GROUND
27
RI_TTL_FP
GROUND
ISP_FPC_SDO
ISP_FPC_EN_L
-12V
28
ISP_SDO
RTS_TTL_FP
GROUND
-12V
GROUND
29
INTRUSION_L
GROUND
DTR_TTL_FP
DVALIDB_L
CPU_SLP_L
30
ISP_SDI
FAN_FAILED_L
SPEAKER_DATA
GROUND
GROUND
31
VCC_STDBY
GROUND
GROUND
FP_TO_PIIX4_PWRBTN
SECURE_MODE_BMC
32
I2C_FPC_SCL
VCC_STDBY
HARD_RESET
DSEL1_L
GROUND
33
I2C_FPC_SDA
GROUND
GROUND
X1IB_L
PWR_GOOD
34
GROUND
DS2P_I2C_SDA
DS2P_I2C_SCL
PS_PWR_ON
GROUND
continued
174
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
F16 and Front Panel Connector, J3 (continued)
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
35
X1D_L(0)
GROUND
GROUND
FP_NMI_SWT_L
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L
36
X1D_L(1)
X1XRTS_L
X1HRTS_L
GROUND
GROUND
37
X1D_L(3)
GROUND
GROUND
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC
38
X1D_L(4)
X1D_L(2)
X1BE_L(0)
GROUND
GROUND
39
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC
X1BLK_L
40
X1D_L(6)
X1D_L(5)
X1PAR_L
GROUND
GROUND
41
X1D_L(8)
GROUND
GROUND
I2C_BACKUP_SCL
X1RST_L
42
X1D_L(9)
X1D_L(7)
X1ADS_L
GROUND
GROUND
43
GROUND
GROUND
X1D_L(11)
I2C_BACKUP_SDA
MIOC_INTREQ_L
44
X1D_L(12)
X1D_L(10)
X1BE_L(1)
GROUND
GROUND
45
X1D_L(14)
GROUND
X1XSTBN_L
X1XSTBP_L
GROUND
46
X1D_L(15)
X1D_L(13)
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
47
GROUND
GROUND
5V_SENSE
X1HSTBP_L
GROUND
48
X1CLK
5V_RET_SENSE
GROUND
X1HSTBN_L
GROUND
175
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Grand Connector to Mem A, J4 and Mem B, J1
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
1
MD#(35)
GND
MD#(34)
GND
MD#(33)
2
GND
MD#(32)
GND
MD#(31)
+1.5V
3
MD#(30)
GND
DSTBN1#
GND
MD#(29)
4
GND
MD#(28)
GND
MD#(27)
GND
5
MD#(26)
GND
DSTBP1#
GND
MD#(25)
6
GND
MD#(24)
GND
MD#(23)
+1.5V
7
MD#(22)
GND
MD#(21)
GND
MD#(20)
8
GND
GND
GND
MD#(19)
GND
9
MUXCLK0
GND
MD#(17)
GND
MD#(18)
10
GND
GND
GND
Was DSEL#
GND
11
MRESET#
GND
Was DOFF0_L
GND
Was DOFF1_L
12
GND
MD#(16)
GND
MD#(15)
+1.5V
13
MD#(14)
GND
MD#(13)
GND
MD#(12)
14
GND
MD#(11)
GND
MD#(10)
GND
15
MD#(9)
GND
DSTBP0#
GND
MD#(8)
16
GND
MD#(7)
GND
MD#(6)
+1.5V
17
MD#(5)
GND
DSTBN0#
GND
MD#(4)
18
GND
MD#(3)
GND
GND
GND
19
MD#(2)
GND
MD#(1)
GND
SPARECLK0
20
GND
MD#(0)
GND
GND
GND
21
TCK
GND
TDI
GND
TMS
22
GND
TRST#
GND
MA#(13)
GND
23
MA#(12)
GND
MA#(11)
GND
MA#(10)
24
GND
MA#(9)
GND
MA#(8)
+1.5V
25
MA#(7)
GND
MA#(6)
GND
MA#(5)
26
GND
MA#(4)
GND
GND
GND
27
MA#(3)
GND
MA#(2)
GND
RCGCLK
28
GND
MA#(1)
GND
GND
GND
29
MA#(0)
GND
CSTB#
GND
ROW#
30
GND
CMND1#
GND
BANK0#
+1.5V
31
BANK1#
GND
BANK2#
GND
CMND0#
32
GND
CARD#
GND
GND
GND
33
PHIT#
GND
RCMPLT#
GND
SPARECLK1
34
GND
RHIT#
GND
GND
GND
35
Unused
GND
Unused
GND
Unused
36
GND
MD#(71)
GND
MD#(70)
GND
37
MD#(69)
GND
MD#(68)
GND
MD#(67)
38
GND
MD#(66)
GND
MD#(65)
+1.5V
39
MD#(64)
GND
DSTBN3#
GND
MD#(63)
continued
176
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
Grand Connector to Mem A, J4 and Mem B, J1 (continued)
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
40
GND
MD#(62)
GND
MD#(61)
GND
41
MD#(60)
GND
DSTBP3#
GND
MD#(59)
42
GND
GND
GND
MD#(58)
GND
43
MUXCLK1
GND
MD#(56)
GND
MD#(57)
44
GND
GND
GND
MD#(55)
GND
45
MD#(54)
GND
Unused
GND
Was DCMPLT#
46
GND
Was DVALID#
GND
Was WDEVT#
+1.5V
47
MD#(53)
GND
MD#(52)
GND
MD#(51)
48
GND
MD#(50)
GND
MD#(49)
GND
49
MD#(48)
GND
DSTBP2#
GND
MD#(47)
50
GND
MD#(46)
GND
MD#(45)
+1.5V
51
MD#(44)
GND
DSTBN2#
GND
MD#(43)
52
GND
MD#(42)
GND
MD#(41)
GND
53
MD#(40)
GND
MD#(39)
GND
MD#(38)
54
GND
MD#(37)
GND
MD#(36)
+1.5V
Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector J2
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
12V
3.3V
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
177
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5
Signals
178
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
3.3V
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P1X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P1X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P1X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X1
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X2
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
P2X3
GND
GND
12V
5V
5V
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7
Signals
Pins
A
B
C
D
E
1
GND
MD#(36)
GND
MD#(37)
+3.3V
2
GDCMPLT#
+3.3V
DSTBN2#
GND
MD#(38)
3
GND
MD#(39)
GND
MD#(40)
+3.3V
4
MD#(41)
+3.3V
DSTBP2#
GND
MD#(42)
5
GND
MD#(43)
GND
MD#(44)
+3.3V
6
MD#(45)
+3.3V
MD#(46)
GND
MD#(47)
7
GND
MD#(48)
GND
MD#(49)
+3.3V
8
MD#(50)
+3.3V
MD#(51)
GND
MD#(52)
9
GND
MD#(53)
GND
WDEVT#
+3.3V
10
DCMPLT#
+3.3V
MD#(54)
GND
DVALID#
11
GND
GND
+1.5V
MD#(55)
+3.3V
12
MUXCLK1
GND
MD#(56)
GND
MD#(57)
13
GND
GND
+1.5V
MD#(58)
+3.3V
14
MD#(59)
+3.3V
DSTBP3#
GND
MD#(60)
15
GND
MD#(61)
GND
MD#(62)
+3.3V
16
MD#(63)
+3.3V
DSTBN3#
GND
MD#(64)
17
GND
MD#(65)
GND
MD#(66)
+3.3V
18
+1.5V
+3.3V
MD#(67)
GND
MD#(68)
19
GND
MD#(69)
GND
MD#(70)
+3.3V
20
MD#(71)
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
+3.3V
21
GND
22
+3.3V
+3.3V
CARD_NUM
GND
I2C_BMC_SCL
23
GND
GND
+1.5V
PWRGD
+3.3V
24
SPARECLK1
GND
PHIT#
GND
I2C_BMC_SDA
25
GND
GND
+1.5V
RHIT#
+3.3V
26
+1.5V
+3.3V
RCMPLT#
GND
+3.3V
GND
+3.3V
27
GND
CARD#
GND
GRCMPLT#
+3.3V
28
CMND0#
+3.3V
BANK0#
GND
BANK1#
29
GND
BANK2#
GND
CMND1#
+3.3V
30
+1.5V
+3.3V
ROW#
GND
CSTB#
31
GND
GND
+1.5V
MA#(0)
+3.3V
32
RCGCLK
GND
MA#(1)
GND
MA#(2)
33
GND
GND
+1.5V
MA#(3)
+3.3V
34
MA#(4)
+3.3V
MA#(5)
GND
MA#(6)
35
GND
MA#(7)
GND
MA#(8)
+3.3V
36
MA#(9)
+3.3V
MA#(10)
GND
MA#(11)
37
GND
MA#(12)
GND
MA#(13)
+3.3V
continued
179
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7 (continued)
Signals
Pins
180
A
B
C
D
E
38
+1.5V
+3.3V
39
GND
GND
TMS
GND
+3.3V
+1.5V
TRST#
+3.3V
40
SPARECLK0
GND
TDI
GND
TDO
41
GND
GND
+1.5V
TCK
+3.3V
42
MD#(0)
+3.3V
MD#(1)
GND
MD#(2)
43
GND
MD#(3)
GND
MD#(4)
+3.3V
44
MD#(5)
+3.3V
DSTBN0#
GND
MD#(6)
45
GND
MD#(7)
GND
MD#(8)
+3.3V
46
MD#(9)
+3.3V
DSTBP0#
GND
MD#(10)
47
GND
MD#(11)
GND
MD#(12)
+3.3V
48
MD#(13)
+3.3V
MD#(14)
GND
MD#(15)
49
GND
DOFF1#
GND
DOFF0#
+3.3V
50
MD#(16)
+3.3V
DSEL#
GND
MRESET#
51
GND
GND
+1.5V
MD#(17)
+3.3V
52
MUXCLK0
GND
MD#(18)
GND
MD#(19)
53
GND
GND
+1.5V
MD#(20)
+3.3V
54
MD#(21)
+3.3V
MD#(22)
GND
MD#(23)
55
GND
MD#(24)
GND
MD#(25)
+3.3V
56
MD#(26)
+3.3V
DSTBP1#
GND
MD#(27)
57
GND
MD#(28)
GND
MD#(29)
+3.3V
58
GDCMPLT#
+3.3V
DSTBN1#
GND
MD#(30)
59
GND
MD#(31)
GND
MD#(32)
+3.3V
60
MD#(33)
+3.3V
MD#(34)
GND
MD#(35)
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages
Power Supply Connectors J8, J9, & J10
Pin
Signal (Description)
Pin
Signal (Description)
Pin
Signal (Description)
1
VCC12
19
VCC12
37
VCC12
2
VCC12
20
VCC12
38
GND
3
GND
21
GND
38
GND
4
GND
22
PRED_FAIL_PSxl
40
M12V (-12V)
5
VBIAS (+24V)
23
PSx_SCL (I²C SCL)
41
PSx_SDA (I²C SDA)
6
12V_SENSE
(12V Rem.Sense)
24
PGOOD (AC OK)
42
PSx_FAULT
7
VCC5STBY
25
P5V_LS (5V Load Share)
43
P3_3V_LS
(3.3V Load Share)
8
GND_SENSE
(Gnd Rem. Sense)
26
P12V_LS
(12V Load Share)
44
PWR_ON_SUPPLIES
9
spare
27
PSxRS3
(+3.3V Rem. Sense)
45
PSxRS5
10
spare
28
spare
46
PSx_PRESENT
11
GND
29
GND
47
GND
12
GND
30
GND
48
GND
13
VCC3
31
GND
49
GND
14
VCC3
32
GND
50
GND
15
VCC3
33
GND
51
GND
16
VCC3
34
VCC5
52
VCC5
17
VCC3
35
VCC5
53
VCC5
18
VCC3
36
VCC5
54
VCC5
Peripheral Power Connector J11
Pin #
Signal:
Pin #
Signal:
1
VCC12
11
VCC12
2
GND
12
GND
3
VCC12
13
VCC12
4
VCC5
14
VCC5
5
GND
15
GND
6
VCC5
16
VCC5
7
GND
17
GND
8
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL
18
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA
9
GND
19
GND
10
PWR_GOOD
20
RESET_IIC_L
White text
181
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description
This chapter describes the peripheral bay backplane and lists its SCSI ID.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Peripheral Bay Backplane
The WideUltra disk backplane supports hot-swapping of SCA-type SCSI drives, manages the
enclosure (chassis), and monitors server functions conforming to the SCSI-Accessed
Fault-Tolerant Enclosures (SAF-TE) specification. The disk backplane provides:
• an independent SCSI channel
• two SCA-2 connectors for SCA-type SCSI hard disk drives
• active terminators that terminate the backplane end of the SCSI bus (SCSI-3 compliant)
• power control for each drive that automatically powers down a slot when a drive failure is
detected and reported or a drive is removed (when a new drive is inserted, the power control
waits a few moments and then applies power to the new drive)
• three light-emitting diodes (LEDs) for each drive
 power LEDs indicate the drives are receiving power
 activity LEDs indicate the drives are being accessed
•
•
•
•
 drive fault LEDs indicate the failure status of each drive (during server initialization, they
flash for one second)
intrachassis I2C bus
I2C bus temperature sensor for each microcontroller
interchassis I2C bus support, per SAF-TE specification
serial EEPROM for nonvolatile information storage
The SCA-2 connectors on the disk backplane provide control signals and power for up to two
wide/fast 3.5-inch SCA-type SCSI hard disk drives. The backplane receives control signals from a
Symbios 53C896 host adapter on the PHP I/O baseboard.
The fault indicator LEDs on the front panel indicate failure status for each drive in the hot-docking
bays. These indicators get their signals through a cable connected to the front panel connector on
the disk backplane.
The temperature sensor on the disk backplane provides temperature information to other devices in
the server through enclosure service messages.
The disk backplane power control provides powering down of a drive when a failure is detected
and reported to the SCSI bus through enclosure service messages. When a new drive is inserted in
an SCA connector, the power control waits a short time for the drive to become fully seated and
183
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
then applies power to the drive. Power control also lets you insert and store a spare drive in an
SCA connector. When a drive fails, the spare drive can be put into service.
SCSI ID Configurations
The SCSI chip on the peripheral bay backplane uses the SAF-TE protocol to communicate with
the I/O baseboard and uses SCSI ID 6.
Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors
A
B
C
H
D
G
E
F
OM07352
Figure 16-1. Peripheral Bay Backplane
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
184
SCSI Hot-Swap connector
SCSI Hot-Swap connector
Power connector
Diskette connector
IDE connector
Power connector
Blindmate connector
SCSI connector
White text
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting
Configuration Jumpers
This chapter describes the PHP I/O baseboard and tells how to configure the jumpers.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
PHP Input/Output (I/O) Baseboard Features
The PHP I/O baseboard provides the primary I/O interface of the server. The baseboard also
interfaces with the CPU baseboard through the Midplane. The PHP I/O baseboard provides:
•
three functionally independent PCI buses
 32-bit primary PCI bus
 32-bit secondary PCI bus
•
•
•
•
 64-bit PCI bus
integrated Symbios 53C896 Dual Channel LVDS controller
integrated IDE controller that supports one IDE bus
onboard video, serial, parallel, and universal serial bus (USB) ports
user-accessible expansion slots
 five 32-bit regular PCI bus slots
 four 64-bit hot-plug PCI bus slots
•
 one shared 16-bit ISA/32-bit PCI bus slot
I2C server management interface
185
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
32-bit PCI Expansion Slots
Six 32-bit PCI bus master slots (two primary and four secondary) on the PHP I/O baseboard
provide expansion enhancement. One 32-bit primary slot shares a common chassis expansion slot
with the ISA slot; you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both. The PCI bus
operates at 33 MHz and provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
✏
32-bit memory addressing
+3.3 V and +5 V environments
burst transfers of up to 133 MB/sec
8-, 16-, or 32-bit data transfers
plug and play configuration
hierarchical bus to maximize connectivity
NOTE
Add-in video boards must be installed in the 32-bit primary PCI slots.
64-bit PCI Hot-plug Expansion Slots
Four 64-bit PCI hot-plug bus master slots on the PHP I/O baseboard provide maximum
performance at the wider bus width.
✏
NOTE
Both 32-bit and 64-bit PCI boards may be installed in the 64-bit slots.
However, the 32-bit boards will not take advantage of the extra bandwidth
provided by the 64-bit bus.
Add-in video boards must be installed in the 32-bit primary PCI slots.
ISA Expansion Slot
The ISA bus master slot on the PHP I/O baseboard provides for legacy expansion. The ISA slot
shares a common chassis I/O expansion slot with a 32-bit PCI slot; you can use the shared slot for
either ISA or PCI but not both. The ISA bus operates at up to 8.33 MHz and provides
•
•
•
•
•
186
24-bit memory addressing
type A transfers at 5.33 MB per second
type B transfers at 8 MB per second
8- or 16-bit data transfers
interrupt sharing
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
PCI Video Controller
The onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator is a 64-bit DRAM-based SVGA
controller with hardware-accelerated BitBLT transfers of data, video playback, and video capture
to the frame buffer. The frame buffer is addressable through a 16-Mbyte window consisting of
three, 4-Mbyte byte-swapping apertures, and a special video aperture. The SVGA controller also
features a 64-bit GUI BitBLT engine with double-buffered, memory-mapped control registers.
The control registers are relocatable anywhere in the 64-Kbyte space; this allows multiple devices
in a single server.
The SVGA controller is fully compatible with these video standards: CGA, EGA, Hercules
graphics, MDA, and VGA. The server comes with 2 MB of onboard video DRAM allowing the
controller to support 132-column text modes and high resolution graphics with 1280 x 1024 x 16
colors. Depending on the environment, the controller displays up to 16.7 M colors in some video
resolutions.
The SVGA controller supports analog VGA monitors (single and multiple frequency, interlaced
and noninterlaced) with a maximum vertical retrace interlaced frequency of 87 Hz.
Video Modes
The CL-GD5446 provides all the standard IBM VGA modes. The following tables show all the
supported video modes.
Standard VGA Modes
Modes
in Hex
Colors
(number/
palette
size)
Char. x
Row
Char.
Cell
0, 1
16/256K
40 x 25
9 x 16
2, 3
16/256K
80 x 25
4, 5
4/256K
40 x 25
6
2/256K
80 x 25
8x8
7
Mono
80 x 25
9 x 16
D
16/256K
40 x 25
8x8
320 X 200
E
16/256K
80 x 25
8 x 14
640 X 200
Graphics
25
31.5
70
F
Mono
80 x 25
8 x 14
640 X 350
Graphics
25
31.5
70
10
16/256K
80 x 25
8 x 14
640 X 350
Graphics
25
31.5
70
11
2/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
25
31.5
60
11*
2/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
31.5
37.9
72
11*
2/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
31.5
37.5
75
12
16/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
25
31.5
60
12*
16/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
31.5
37.9
72
12*
16/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
31.5
37.5
75
12*
16/256K
80 x 30
8 x 16
640 X 480
Graphics
35.8
43.3
85
13
256/256K
40 x 25
8x8
320 X 200
Graphics
12.5
31.5
70
Resolution
Display
Mode
Pixel
Freq.
(MHz)
Horiz.
Freq.
(KHz)
Vert.
Freq.
(Hz)
360 X 400
Text
14
31.5
70
9 x 16
720 X 400
Text
28
31.5
70
8x8
320 X 200
Graphics
12.5
31.5
70
640 X 200
Graphics
25
31.5
70
720 X 400
Text
28
31.5
70
Graphics
12.5
31.5
70
187
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Extended VGA Modes
Resolution
Pixel
Freq.
(MHz)
Horiz.
Freq.
(KHz)
Vert.
Freq.
(Hz)
100 x 37
800 X 600
36
35.2
56
100 x 37
800 X 600
40
37.8
60
16/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
50
48.1
72
58, 6A
16/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
49.5
46.9
75
5C
256/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
36
35.2
56
5C
256/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
40
37.9
60
5C
256/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
50
48.1
72
5C
256/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
49.5
46.9
75
5C
256/256K
100 x 37
800 X 600
56.25
53.7
85
5D*
16/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
44.9
35.5
43
5D
16/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
65
48.3
60
5D
16/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
75
56
70
5D*
16/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
77
58
72
5D
16/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
78.5
60
75
5E
256/256K
80 x 25
640 x 400
25
31.5
70
5F
256/256K
80 x 30
640 X 480
25
31.5
60
5F
256/256K
80 x 30
640 X 480
31.5
37.9
72
5F
256/256K
80 x 30
640 X 480
31.5
37.5
75
5F
256/256K
80 x 30
640 X 480
36
43.3
85
60*
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
44.9
35.5
43
60
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
65
48.3
60
60
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
75
56
70
60
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
77
58
72
60
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
78.7
60
75
60
256/256K
128 x 48
1024 X 768
94.5
68.3
85
64
64K
-
-
640 X 480
25
31.5
60
64
64K
-
-
640 X 480
31.5
37.9
72
64
64K
-
-
640 X 480
31.5
37.5
75
64
64K
-
-
640 X 480
36
43.3
85
65
64K
-
-
800 X 600
36
35.2
56
65
64K
-
-
800 X 600
40
37.8
60
65
64K
-
-
800 X 600
50
48.1
72
65
64K
-
-
800 X 600
49.5
46.9
75
65
64K
-
-
800 X 600
56.25
53.7
85
66
32K
‡
-
-
640 X 480
25
31.5
60
‡
-
-
640 X 480
31.5
37.9
72
Mode(s)
in Hex
Colors
(number/
palette size)
Char. x
Row
58, 6A
16/256K
58, 6A
16/256K
58, 6A
66
32K
Char.
Cell
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.
continued
188
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Extended VGA Modes (continued)
Resolution
Pixel
Freq.
(MHz)
Horiz.
Freq.
(KHz)
Vert.
Freq.
(Hz)
640 X 480
31.5
37.5
75
-
640 X 480
36
43.3
85
-
-
800 X 600
36
35.2
56
-
-
800 X 600
40
37.8
60
-
-
800 X 600
50
48.1
72
‡
-
-
800 X 600
49.5
46.9
75
‡
-
-
800 X 600
56.25
53.7
85
‡
-
-
1024 x 768
44.9
35.5
43
‡
-
-
1024 x 768
65
48.3
60
‡
-
-
1024 x 768
75
56
70
‡
-
-
1024 x 768
78.7
60
75
‡
-
-
1024 x 768
94.5
68.3
85
‡
-
-
1280 x 1024
75
48
43
‡
Mode(s)
in Hex
Colors
(number/
palette size)
66
32K
66
67
Char. x
Row
Char.
Cell
‡
-
-
‡
-
‡
‡
‡
32K
32K
67
32K
67
32K
67
32K
67
32K
68
32K
68
68
32K
32K
68
32K
68
32K
69*
32K
69*
32K
-
-
1280 x 1024
108
65
60
6C*
16/256K
160 x 64
8 x 16
1280 X 1024
75
48
43
6D*
256/256K
160 x 64
8 x 16
1280 X 1024
75
48
43
6D
256/256K
160 x 64
8 x 16
1280 X 1024
108
65
60
6D
256/256K
160 x 64
8 x 16
1280 X 1024
126
76
71.2
6D
256/256K
160 x 64
8 x 16
1280 X 1024
135
80
75
71
16M
-
-
640 X 480
25
31.5
60
71
16M
-
-
640 X 480
31.5
37.9
72
71
16M
-
-
640 X 480
31.5
37.5
75
71
16M
-
-
640 X 480
36
43.3
85
‡
43
74*
64K
-
-
1024 X 768
44.9
35.5
74
64K
-
-
1024 X 768
65
48.3
60
74
64K
-
-
1024 X 768
75
56
70
74
64K
-
-
1024 X 768
78.7
60
75
74
64K
94.5
68.3
85
-
-
1024 X 768
75*
‡
64K
-
-
1280 X 1024
75
48
43
78
16M
-
-
800 x 600
36
35.2
56
78
16M
-
-
800 x 600
40
37.8
60
78
16M
-
-
800 x 600
50
48.1
72
78
16M
-
-
800 x 600
49.5
46.9
75
78
16M
-
-
800 x 600
56.25
53.7
85
79
16M
-
-
800 x 600
44.9
35.5
43
79
16M
-
-
1024 x 768
65
483
60
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.
continued
189
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Extended VGA Modes (continued)
Resolution
Pixel
Freq.
(MHz)
Horiz.
Freq.
(KHz)
Vert.
Freq.
(Hz)
1024 x 768
75
56
70
-
1024 x 768
78.7
60
75
-
-
1024 x 768
94.5
68.3
85
256/256K
144 x 54
8 x 16
1152 x 864
94.5
63.9
70
256/256K
144 x 54
8 x 16
1152 x 864
108
67.5
75
7D
64K
-
-
1152 x 864
94.5
63.9
70
7D
64K
-
-
1152 x 864
94.5
67.5
75
Mode(s)
in Hex
Colors
(number/
palette size)
Char. x
Row
Char.
Cell
79
16M
-
-
79
16M
-
79
16M
7C
7C
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.
Symbios 53C896 SCSI Controller
A Symbios 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller provides embedded SCSI on the primary 32-bit PCI
bus. The configuration registers define PCI-related parameters for the 53C896 device. The
53C896 supports all mandatory registers in the PCI configuration space header, including the
vendor ID, device ID, class code, revision ID, header type, and command and status fields.
The 53C896 supports two LVDS channels. One channel controls slow devices such as CD-ROMs,
and DVDs; the other channel provides a high speed connection to the internal LVDS drives or an
external disk array.
IDE Controller
The PIIX4 multifunction device on the PHP I/O baseboard acts as a PCI-based Fast IDE controller
that supports:
•
•
•
•
•
PIO and IDE DMA/bus master operations
Mode 4 timings
transfer rates up to 33 MB/sec
buffering for PCI/IDE burst transfers
master/slave IDE mode
Server Management (SM)
During normal operation, SM receives information about the status of the server. SM also
monitors the power supply voltages and operating temperature of the server. If SM determines
that the server is not operating within specified limits, it attempts to notify a supervisor or an
administrator about the condition of the server. The microcontrollers on the front panel board, disk
backplane, and PHP I/O baseboard implement the server management features.
190
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Front Panel Controller (FPC)
Where located: on the front panel board
What it manages:
•
server power control consolidation from several sources
 push-button power signal from the front panel connector
 real-time clock (RTC)
 server monitor module (SMM), if installed
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
 commands from the Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB)
power and reset switch interfaces
fault LEDs
chassis, midplane and power supplies Field Replacement Unit (FRU) inventory interface
server hard reset generation
server power fault indication
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) bridge device
EMP connection
LCD interface
Board Management Controller (BMC)
Where located: on the PHP I/O baseboard
What it provides:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
temperature and voltage monitoring of the I/O and CPU baseboards
threshold comparison functions
SMI (systems management interrupt) generation
watchdog timer and certain GPIO (general purpose input/output) functions
fault-resilient booting
processor presence, Voltage ID (VID), IERR, and thermal trip monitoring
server event log, event time stamping, sensor data record information, and DIMM ID
information interface
current event status and sensor readings when polled by System Management Software
Hot-swap Controller (HSC)
Where located: on the disk backplane
What it does:
•
•
•
•
•
•
implements the SAF-TE command set
controls the fault lights and drive power-on
provides a path for management information via SCSI
retrieves drive fault status, backplane temperature, and fan failure information via the IPMB
queries the status of the front panel controller for power supply information
controls drive power-on and power-down, facilitating hot-swapping
191
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
I/O Riser Card
The I/O riser card contains all the legacy I/O connections such as video, keyboard, mouse, etc.
The card plugs into the legacy connector on the PHP I/O baseboard and provides the following
external connectors:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PS/2-compatible keyboard (interchangeable with the mouse)
PS/2-compatible mouse (interchangeable with the keyboard)
parallel port
two serial ports
VGA video port
ICMB connector interface
I
A
H
G
F
C
E
D
B
OM08099
Figure 17-1. I/O Riser Card
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
192
I/O riser card
USB (connectors mounted on PHP I/O baseboard)
Parallel port
Video port
Serial port 2
Serial port 1
Keyboard port
Mouse port
ICMB connector
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
PHP I/O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers
You can use the configuration jumpers on the PHP I/O baseboard to recover a BIOS, clear a
CMOS password, or clear all CMOS settings. Figure 17-2 shows the jumper positions for the
default system configuration. The reserved pins may not be populated in shipping configurations.
Table 17-1 shows the minimum default configurations in bold face type.
J2C1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
A
B
C
A
B
OM08476
Figure 17-2. J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block
193
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Table 17-1. Configuration Jumpers (J2C1)
Pins (default in bold)
Function
1(B–C)
1(A–B)
2(B–C)
2(A–B)
3(B–C)
3(A–B)
4(B–C)
4(A–B)
5(B–C)
5(A–B)
6(B–C)
6(A–B)
7(B–C)
7(A–B)
8(B–C)
8(A–B)
Disable programming onboard programmable devices
Allow programming of onboard programmable devices
Normal boot
Boot Recovery BIOS
Reserved
Reserved
Allow BIOS flash update
Disable BIOS flash update
Do not clear CMOS
Clear CMOS
Do not clear password
Clear password
Do not override PHP switches
Override PHP switches
Disable I/O SPI chain
Allow I/O SPI chain
Restoring CMOS to Default Values
The jumper on J2C1 pins 5(B-C) preserves the settings stored in CMOS nonvolatile memory
(NVRAM) during server reset. Moving the jumper to pins 5(A-B) clears CMOS and sets it and the
real-time clock (RTC) to the Setup default values during server reset.
To clear CMOS and restore the Setup default values:
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
4. Move the jumper on J2C1 from pins 5(B-C) to pins 5(A-B).
5. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.
6. Turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. This automatically restores CMOS and
RTC to Setup default values. See Chapter 3, “Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”
7. Turn off the server, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 5(A-B) to pins 5(B-C).
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.
10. Run the SSU to configure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
194
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Clearing the Password
The jumper on J2C1 pins 6(B-C) protects the CMOS password during server reset. Moving the
jumper to pins 6(A-B) clears the password during server reset.
To clear the CMOS password:
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
4. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6(B-C) to pins 6(A-B).
5. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.
6. Turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. This automatically clears the password.
See Chapter 3, “Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”
7. Turn off the server, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6(A-B) to pins 6(B-C).
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.
10. Run the SSU to configure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
Updating the BIOS
The jumper on J2C1 pins 4(B-C) applies +12 V power to the VPP pin on the flash memory device.
This allows you to update the BIOS in flash memory with the Flash Update Utility. Moving the
jumper to pins 4(A-B) protects the contents of flash memory.
✏
NOTE
For a copy of the latest system BIOS release to create a Flash update utility
diskette, contact your dealer or sales representative.
Before you can update the system BIOS from the Flash Update Utility diskette, you must make the
diskette MS-DOS bootable. You must have either MS-DOS version 5.00 or 6.00 (or greater)
installed on C:\DOS. To prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system, the
update utility insures that the BIOS matches the target system.
✏
NOTE
Please review the update utility instructions and the release notes distributed
with the update utility and BIOS code before attempting to update the BIOS.
The BIOS update utility allows you to update the
•
•
•
BIOS in flash memory
user and logo area of the BIOS
language section of the BIOS
195
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Recording the Current BIOS Settings
Before updating the BIOS, record your current BIOS settings. You will need them to configure
your server at the end of the update procedure.
1. Turn on your video monitor and your server. Each time you turn on or reboot your server
POST begins and, after a few seconds, displays this message:
Press <F2> to enter Setup
2. After pressing F2, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests
and initialization functions. When Setup is entered, write down the current settings.
Creating the BIOS Update Diskette
The BIOS update file is a compressed self-extracting archive that contains the files you need to
update the BIOS.
1. Copy the BIOS update file to a temporary directory on your hard disk.
2. From the C:\ prompt, change to the temporary directory.
3. To extract the file, type the name of the BIOS update file; for example, type 10006BI1.EXE
and press <Enter>. The extracted files include
• LICENSE.TXT—software license agreement
• README.TXT—instructions for the BIOS update
• BIOINSTR.TXT—instructions for creating a bootable diskette
• BIOS.EXE—BIOS update software
4. Insert the bootable diskette into drive A.
5. Change to the temporary directory that holds the BIOS.EXE file.
6. Type BIOS A: and press <Enter> to extract the BIOS.EXE file to the diskette.
✏
NOTE
If the extracted files do not include the BIOS.EXE file, you must extract the
BIOS update file directly to the bootable diskette in drive A.
Example: type 10006BI1 A: and press <Enter>.
Running the BIOS Update Utility
Remember to write down the current BIOS settings before running the BIOS update utility.
1. Observe the precautions on page 111, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Insert the update diskette into drive A, and turn on the monitor and server. When the server
boots from the diskette, follow the screen prompts.
If you choose option 1, the server will automatically reboot after the update process completes
so that the changes will take effect. Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot.
If you choose option 2, you must reboot the server by pressing reset or <Enter> after the update
process completes for the changes to take effect. Remove the diskette when the server starts to
boot.
3. As the server boots, check the BIOS identifier—version number—to make sure the update was
successful.
196
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
4. When the following message appears, press <F2>.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
5. After entering Setup, press <F9> to load Setup defaults; then press <Enter> to confirm.
6. Set the Setup options to the settings you wrote down before updating the BIOS.
7. Press <F10> to exit and save the settings; then press <Enter> to confirm and to reboot the
server.
8. To protect the contents of flash memory, turn off the server, unplug the power cords from the
power supplies or wall outlets, and remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12,
“Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
9. Move the jumper from J2C1B pins 4(B-C) to pins 4(A-B) to write-protect the flash memory
device.
10. Reinstall the covers, plug in the power cords, and turn on the server.
✏
NOTE
If the system BIOS becomes corrupted during the update process—for
example, a power outage occurs—follow the “Recovering the BIOS”
procedure on page 197.
Recovering the BIOS
Moving the boot option jumper on J2C1 from pins 2(B-C) to pins 2(A-B) enables the BIOS flash
memory boot recovery mode. The BIOS can be corrupted—for example, when the update
procedure is aborted due to a power outage. However, flash memory contains a protected area that
cannot be corrupted. Code in this area is used to boot the server from drive A when the BIOS has
been corrupted. After booting, the Flash Update Utility (IFLASH) is used to automatically recover
the BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette.
To recover the BIOS:
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
4. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2(B-C) to pins 2(A-B) to allow the server to boot from the
recovery BIOS.
5. Reinstall the top and side covers, plug in the power cords, and insert the Flash Update Utility
diskette in drive A.
197
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
6. Turn on the monitor and server. After the server boots, the speaker emits a single beep and the
recovery process starts—it takes about three minutes. When the recovery process completes,
the speaker emits two beeps.
While in the recovery mode, there is no screen display on the monitor. The keyboard is
disabled as the server automatically recovers the BIOS. The following beep codes describe the
recovery status.
Beep Code
Message
1
Recovery process starting.
2
Successful completion, no errors.
4
The server could not boot from the diskette; it may not be bootable.
Continuous series
of low beeps
The wrong BIOS recovery files are being used and/or the flash memory jumper
is in the wrong position.
7. After successful completion of restoring the recovery BIOS, remove the diskette, turn off the
server and monitor, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2(A-B) to pins 2(B-C)—the normal boot mode.
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.
10. After running the special recovery mode, run the SSU to specify a new password. See
Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
Updating BMC, FPC, and HCS Firmware
For a copy of the latest BMC, FPC, and HSC firmware releases, contact your dealer or sales
representative.
Before you can update the firmware from the firmware update diskettes, you must make them
MS-DOS bootable. You must have MS-DOS version 6.00 (or greater) installed on C:\DOS.
✏
NOTE
Please review the firmware release notes distributed with the firmware
update package before attempting to update the firmware of any
microcontroller.
198
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Boot Sequence
The PHP I/O baseboard provides the server with a variety of methods for detecting and booting an
operating system. The BIOS scans devices and user configurable option slots in a specific
sequence. Knowing the precise sequence the BIOS detects, sets up, and boots, assists in defining
the server configuration.
1.
Location
J1E2
Bus
ISA
IDSEL
None
Comment
Floppy Drive
J3B1
ISA
None
Compatibility (Legacy) Boot Slot 1
J1G2
IDE
None
Primary IDE
P1
Primary PCI
25
Expansion Slot
J2G1
Primary PCI
26
On board SCSI
P2
Primary PCI
27
Expansion Slot
U4G1
Primary PCI
28
On board Video
U3D1
Primary PCI
31
PIIX4 Component
P3
Secondary PCI
20
Expansion Slot
P4
Secondary PCI
21
Expansion Slot
P5
Secondary PCI
22
Expansion Slot
P6
Secondary PCI
23
Expansion Slot
U7E2
Secondary PCI
25
PID Component
P7
64 Bit PCI
20
Expansion Slot
P8
64 Bit PCI
21
Expansion Slot
P9
64 Bit PCI
22
Expansion Slot
P10
64 Bit PCI
23
Expansion Slot
1
1
1
Install user supplied video adapters only in slots P1 or P2.
199
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
PHP I/O Baseboard Layout
A B
CD
E
F
G
H
I
N
J
M
L
K
OM07313
Figure 17-3. PHP I/O Baseboard Layout
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
200
J1G2, Primary IDE port
J2G1, Primary SCSI port
J1E2, Diskette drive port
J2E2, Secondary SCSI port
J1C1, I2C feature connector
J2C1, jumper block
J1A1, USB connector
J2A1, I/O riser card connector
J3B1, 16-bit ISA expansion slot
P1-P6, 32-bit PCI expansion slots
P7-P1064-bit PCI expansion slots
Expander bus power connectors
Expander bus signal connector
B3G1, Battery
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
PHP I/O Baseboard Connectors
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
COM2_TO_FP_EN
A1
GND
B1
GND
C1
IO_TCK
A2
XIMB_SOUT_EN
B2
SIN_TTL_COM2
C2
IO_TDO
A3
GND
B3
IO_TMS
C3
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)
A4
IO_TDI
B4
PWRGDB
C4
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)
A5
GND
B5
A20M_L
C5
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)
A6
CPU_SPI_RESET_L
B6
PROC_RESET_L
C6
I2C_BMC_SCL
A7
GND
B7
GND
C7
I2C_BMC_SDA
A8
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)
B8
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)
C8
NMI_5V
A9
GND
B9
SMI_L
C9
GND
A10
IGNNE_L
B10
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA
C10
X0D_L(0)
A11
GND
B11
GND
C11
X0D_L(1)
A12
X0XRTS_L
B12
X0HRTS_L
C12
X0D_L(3)
A13
GND
B13
GND
C13
X0D_L(4)
A14
X0D_L(2)
B14
X0BE_L(0)
C14
GND
A15
GND
B15
GND
C15
X0D_L(6)
A16
X0D_L(5)
B16
X0PAR_L
C16
X0D_L(8)
A17
GND
B17
GND
C17
X0D_L(9)
A18
X0D_L(7)
B18
X0ADS_L
C18
GND
A19
GND
B19
X0D_L(11)
C19
X0D_L(12)
A20
X0D_L(10)
B20
X0BE_L(1)
C20
X0D_L(14)
A21
GND
B21
X0XSTBN_L
C21
X0D_L(15)
A22
X0D_L(13)
B22
GND
C22
GND
A23
GND
B23
DOFF0_L
C23
X0CLK
A24
GND
B24
GND
C24
GND
A25
DVALIDA_L
B25
DSR_TTL_FP
C25
CTS_TTL_FP
A26
DOFF1_L
B26
GND
C26
RI_TTL_FP
A27
GND
B27
ISP_FPC_SDO
C27
ISP_SDO
A28
RTS_TTL_FP
B28
GND
C28
INTRUSION_L
A29
GND
B29
DTR_TTL_FP
C29
ISP_SDI
A30
FAN_FAILED
B30
SPEAKER_DATA
C30
VCC_STDBY
A31
GND
B31
GND
C31
I2C_FPC_SCL
A32
VCC_STDBY
B32
HARD_RESET
C32
I2C_FPC_SDA
A33
GND
B33
GND
C33
GND
A34
I2C_DS2P_SDA
B34
I2C_DS2P_SCL
C34
X1D_L(0)
A35
GND
B35
GND
C35
continued
201
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section A, B, & C (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
X1D_L(1)
A36
X1XRTS_L
B36
X1HRTS_L
C36
X1D_L(3)
A37
GND
B37
GND
C37
X1D_L(4)
A38
X1D_L(2)
B38
X1BE_L(0)
C38
GND
A39
GND
B39
GND
C39
X1D_L(6)
A40
X1D_L(5)
B40
X1PAR_L
C40
X1D_L(8)
A41
GND
B41
GND
C41
X1D_L(9)
A42
X1D_L(7)
B42
X1ADS_L
C42
GND
A43
GND
B43
X1D_L(11)
C43
X1D_L(12)
A44
X1D_L(10)
B44
X1BE_L(1)
C44
X1D_L(14)
A45
GND
B45
X1XSTBN_L
C45
X1D_L(15)
A46
X1D_L(13)
B46
GND
C46
GND
A47
GND
B47
5V_SENSE
C47
X1CLK
A48
5V_RET_SENSE
B48
GND
C48
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section D & E
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
COM2_SIO_EN_A_
D1
PIC_CLK
E1
STP_CLK_L
D2
GND
E2
IO_TRST_L
D3
PICD(1)
E3
PICD(0)
D4
GND
E4
INIT_L
D5
RESET_PWR_DIST_L
E5
GND
D6
GND
E6
BMC_SPI_BUS(2)
D7
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)
E7
GND
D8
GND
E8
X0IB_L
D9
CIB_INT0
E9
IO_PWRGD
D10
GND
E10
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL
D11
INTR
E11
GND
D12
GND
E12
DSEL0_L
D13
FERR_L
E13
GND
D14
GND
E14
DCMPLTA_L
D15
X0BLK_L
E15
GND
D16
GND
E16
SIN_TTL_XIMB
D17
X0RST_L
E17
GND
D18
GND
E18
SOUT_TTL_COM2
D19
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
E19
GND
D20
DCD_TTL_FP
E20
X0XSTBP_L
D21
GND
E21
GND
D22
WDEVT_L
E22
continued
202
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section D & E (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
X0HSTBP_L
D23
GND
E23
X0HSTBN_L
D24
DCMPLTB_L
E24
ISP_MODE
D25
ISP_EN_L
E25
ISP_CLK
D26
GND
E26
ISP_FPC_EN_L
D27
(-12V)
E27
(-12V)
D28
GND
E28
DVALIDB_L
D29
CPU_SLP_L
E29
GND
D30
GND
E30
FP_T0_PIIX4_PWRBTN
D31
SECURE_MODE_BMC
E31
DSEL1_L
D32
GND
E32
X1IB_L
D33
PWR_GOOD
E33
PS_PWR_ON
D34
GND
E34
FP_NMI_SWT_L
D35
PWR_CNTR_SFC
E35
GND
D36
GND
E36
PWR_CNTR_RTC_L
D37
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC
E37
GND
D38
GND
E38
I2C_CEL CONNECT_BMC
D39
X1BLK_L
E39
GND
D40
GND
E40
I2C_BACKUP_SCL
D41
X1RST_L
E41
GND
D42
GND
E42
I2C_BACKUP_SDA
D43
MIOC_INTREQ_L
E43
GND
D44
GND
E44
X1XSTBP_L
D45
GND
E45
GND
D46
GND
E46
X1HSTBP_L
D47
GND
E47
X1HSTBN_L
D48
GND
E48
203
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Expander Bus Connector: Power Section
Connectors J10H1C and J10H1D
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+5V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+5V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+5V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+5V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+5V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+5V
Connector J4H1D and J10H1B
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+3.3V
Connectors J4H1B
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+12V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+12V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+12V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+12V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+12V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+12V
P2E3
+3.3V
Connector J4H1C
204
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+3.3V
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
32-bit PCI Connector
*
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
A1
TRST_L
A32
AD16
B1
-12 V
B32
AD17
A2
+12 V
A33
+3.3 V
B2
TCK
B33
C/BE2_L
A3
TMS
A34
FRAME_L
B3
GND (Ground)
B34
GND
A4
TDI
A35
GND
B4
TDO
B35
IRDY_L
A5
+5 V
A36
TRDY_L
B5
+5 V
B36
+3.3 V
A6
INTA_L
A37
GND
B6
+5 V
B37
DEVSEL_L
A7
INTC_L
A38
STOP_L
B7
INTB_L
B38
GND
A8
+5 V
A39
+3.3 V
B8
INTD_L
B39
LOCK_L
A9
RESERVED
A40
SDONE
B9
PRSNT1_L
B40
PERR_L
A10
+5 V
A41
SB0_L
B10
RESERVED
B41
+3.3 V
A11
RESERVED
A42
GND
B11
PRSNT2_L
B42
SERR_L
A12
GND‡
A43
PAR
B12
GND‡
B43
+3.3 V
A13
GND‡
A44
AD15
B13
GND‡
B44
C/BE1_L
A14
RESERVED
A45
+3.3 V
B14
RESERVED
B45
AD14
A15
RESET_L
A46
AD13
B15
GND
B46
GND
A16
+5 V
A47
AD11
B16
CLK
B47
AD12
A17
GRANT_L
A48
GND
B17
GND
B48
AD10
A18
GND
A49
AD9
B18
REQ_L
B49
GND
A19
RESERVED
A50
KEY
B19
+5 V
B50
KEY
A20
AD30
A51
KEY
B20
AD31
B51
KEY
A21
+3.3 V
A52
C/BE0_L
B21
AD29
B52
AD8
A22
AD28
A53
+3.3 V
B22
GND
B53
AD7
A23
AD26
A54
AD6
B23
AD27
B54
+3.3 V
A24
GND
A55
AD4
B24
AD25
B55
AD5
A25
AD24
A56
GND
B25
+3.3 V
B56
AD3
A26
IDSEL
A57
AD2
B26
C/BE3_L
B57
GND
A27
+3.3 V
A58
AD0
B27
AD23
B58
AD1
A28
AD22
A59
+5 V
B28
GND
B59
+5 V
A29
AD20
A60
REQ64_L
B29
AD21
B60
ACK64_L
A30
GND
A61
+5 V
B30
AD19
B61
+5 V
A31
AD18
A62
+5 V
B31
+3.3 V
B62
+5 V
†
The cross (‡) symbol after the signal indicates that the slot serves +5 V compliant devices only.
205
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
64-bit PCI Connector
For pins A1–A62 and B1–B62, the 64-bit PCI connector is identical to the 32-bit PCI connector.
The table below shows the additional extension pins for the 64-bit PCI connector.
206
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
A63
GND (Ground)
B63
RESERVED
A64
C/BE7_L
B64
GND
A65
C/BE5_L
B65
C/BE6_L
A66
+5 V
B66
C/BE4_L
A67
PAR64
B67
GND
A68
AD62
B68
AD63
A69
GND
B69
AD61
A70
AD60
B70
+5 V
A71
AD58
B71
AD59
A72
GND
B72
AD57
A73
AD56
B73
GND
A74
AD54
B74
AD55
A75
+5 V
B75
AD53
A76
AD52
B76
GND
A77
AD50
B77
AD51
A78
GND
B78
AD49
A79
AD48
B79
+5 V
A80
AD46
B80
AD47
A81
GND
B81
AD45
A82
AD44
B82
GND
A83
AD42
B83
AD43
A84
+5 V
B84
AD41
A85
AD40
B85
+5 V
A86
AD38
B86
AD39
A87
GND
B87
AD37
A88
AD36
B88
+5 V
A89
AD34
B89
AD35
A90
GND
B90
AD33
A91
AD32
B91
GND
A92
RESERVED
B92
RESERVED
A93
GND
B93
RESERVED
A94
RESERVED
B94
GND
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
ISA Connector
The ISA connector on the PHP I/O baseboard follows the standard pinout given in the ISA
Specification.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
B1
GND (Ground)
A1
IOCHK_L
B2
RESET
A2
SD7
B3
+5 V
A3
SD6
B4
IRQ9
A4
SD5
B5
-5 V
A5
SD4
B6
DRQ2
A6
SD3
B7
-12 V
A7
SD2
B8
SRDY_L
A8
SD1
B9
+12 V
A9
SD0
B10
GND
A10
IOCHRDY
B11
SMEMW_L
A11
AEN
B12
SMEMR_L
A12
SA19
B13
IOW_L
A13
SA18
B14
IOR_L
A14
SA17
B15
DACK3_L
A15
SA16
B16
DRQ3
A16
SA15
B17
DACK1_L
A17
SA14
B18
DRQ1
A18
SA13
B19
REFRESH_L
A19
SA12
B20
BCLK
A20
SA11
B21
IRQ7
A21
SA10
B22
IRQ6
A22
SA9
B23
IRQ5
A23
SA8
B24
IRQ4
A24
SA7
B25
IRQ3
A25
SA6
B26
DACK2_L
A26
SA5
B27
TC
A27
SA4
B28
BALE
A28
SA3
B29
+5 V
A29
SA2
B30
OSC 14 MHz
A30
SA1
B31
GND
A31
SA0
Key
Key
D1
MEMCS16_L
C1
SBHE_L
D2
IOCS16_L
C2
LA23
D3
IRQ10
C3
LA22
continued
207
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
ISA Connector (continued)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
D4
IRQ11
C4
LA21
D5
IRQ12
C5
LA20
D6
IRQ15
C6
LA19
D7
IRQ14D
C7
LA18
D8
DACK0_L
C8
LA17
D9
DRQ0
C9
MEMR_L
D10
DACK5_L
C10
MEMW_L
D11
DRQ5
C11
SD8
D12
DACK6_L
C12
SD9
D13
DRQ6
C13
SD10
D14
DACK7_L
C14
SD11
D15
DRQ7
C15
SD12
D16
+5 V
C16
SD13
D17
MASTER16_L
C17
SD14
D18
GND
C18
SD15
Diskette Drive Port
208
Pin
Name
Pin
Name
1
GND (Ground)
2
FD_DENSEL
3
GND
4
No Connection
5
Key
6
FD_DRATE0
7
GND
8
FD_INDEX_L
9
GND
10
FD_MTR0_L
11
GND
12
FD_DR1_L
13
GND
14
FD_DR0_L
15
GND
16
FD_MTR1_L
17
FD_MSEN1
18
FD_DIR_L
19
GND
20
FD_STEP_L
21
GND
22
FD_WDATA_L
23
GND
24
FD_WGATE_L
25
GND
26
FD_TRK0_L
27
FD_MSEN0
28
FD_WPROT_L
29
GND
30
FD_RDATA_L
31
GND
32
FD_HDSEL_L
33
GND
34
FD_DSKCHG_L
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Wide/Fast 16-bit SCSI Port
Signal Name
Conn. Pin
Cable Pin
Cable Pin
Conn. Pin
Signal Name
GND (Ground)
1
1
2
35
DB12_L
GND
2
3
4
36
DB13_L
GND
3
5
6
37
DB14_L
GND
4
7
8
38
DB15_L
GND
5
9
10
39
DBP1_L
GND
6
11
12
40
DB0_L
GND
7
13
14
41
DB1_L
GND
8
15
16
42
DB2_L
GND
9
17
18
43
DB3_L
GND
10
19
20
44
DB4_L
GND
11
21
22
45
DB5_L
GND
12
23
24
46
DB6_L
GND
13
25
26
47
DB7_L
GND
14
27
28
48
DBP_L
GND
15
29
30
49
GND
GND
16
31
32
50
GND
TERMPWR
17
33
34
51
TERMPWR
TERMPWR
18
35
36
52
TERMPWR
RESERVED
19
37
38
53
RESERVED
GND
20
39
40
54
GND
GND
21
41
42
55
ATN_L
GND
22
43
44
56
GND
GND
23
45
46
57
BSY_L
GND
24
47
48
58
ACK_L
GND
25
49
50
59
RST_L
GND
26
51
52
60
MSG_L
GND
27
53
54
61
SEL_L
GND
28
55
56
62
C/D_L
GND
29
57
58
63
REQ_L
GND
30
59
60
64
I/O_L
GND
31
61
62
65
DB8_L
GND
32
63
64
66
DB9_L
GND
33
65
66
67
DB10_L
GND
34
67
68
68
DB11_L
209
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
IDE Port
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
RSTDRV
2
GND (Ground)
3
DD7
4
DD8
5
DD6
6
DD9
7
DD5
8
DD10
9
DD4
10
DD11
11
DD3
12
DD12
13
DD2
14
DD13
15
DD1
16
DD14
17
DD0
18
DD15
19
GND
20
KEY PIN
21
DRQ
22
GND
23
DIOW
24
GND
25
DIOR
26
GND
27
IORDY
28
CSEL
29
DACK
30
GND
31
IRQ
32
No connection
33
DA1
34
No connection
35
DA0
36
DA2
37
CS1P_L
38
DS3P_L
39
DHACT_L
40
GND
I2C Feature Connector
210
Pin
1
Name
SMI#
Pin
2
Name
I2CCLK
3
CONP
4
key
5
PWROFF#
6
I2CDATA
7
LPOK
8
KEYUNLK
9
NMI
10
HostAUX
11
RESET#
12
GND
13
GND
14
key
15
SECURE
16
GND
17
INTRUD#
18
NMI_L
19
INIT_L
20
GND
21
KB_DATA
22
MS_DATA
23
KB_CLK
24
MS_CLK
25
Key
26
RESET_BMC_L
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
I2C Connector
Pin
Signal
1
CLK
2
GND
3
DATA
Front Panel Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GND (Ground)
2
+5V
3
VCC_STDBY
4
GND
5
ISP_SCLK
6
FAN_FAILED_L
7
ISP_SDI
8
SPEAKER_DATA
9
ISP_FPC_EN_L
10
INTRUSION_L
11
ISP_MODE
12
RESERVED
13
ISP_FPC_SDO
14
GND
15
VCC_STDBY
16
BMC_TO_FPC_RST_CMD
17
GND
18
PROC_RESET_L
19
COM2_TO_FP_EN
20
SYS_RESET_STATE
21
COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A
22
RST_SFC_L
23
XIMB_SOUT_EN
24
SECURE_MODE_BMC
25
VCC_STDBY
26
HARD_RESET
27
RESERVED
28
FP_NMI_SWT_L
29
SIN_TTL_COM2
30
RESERVED
31
SIN_TTL_XIMB
32
GND
33
SOUT_TTL_COM2
34
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L
35
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
36
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L
37
RESERVED
38
PWR_GOOD
39
GND
40
PS_PWR_ON
41
DCD_TTL_FP
42
GND
43
DSR_TTL_FP
44
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC
45
CTS_TTL_FP
46
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A
47
RI_TTL_FP
48
I2C_FPC_SCL
49
GND
50
I2C_FPC_SDA
51
VCC_STDBY
52
GND
53
RTS_TTL_FP
54
RESERVED
55
DTR_TTL_FP
56
I2C_BACKUP_SCL
57
GND
58
I2C_BACKUP_SDA
59
(key position)
60
GND
211
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Legacy Connector
The legacy connector on the PHP I/O baseboard provides the signals for the external legacy VGA,
serial, parallel, mouse, and keyboard peripheral ports.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
A1
VCC_STDBY
A21
PP_STB_L
B1
+5V
B21
SP0_RTS_L
A2
KB_DATA
A22
PP_SLIN_L
B2
MS_DATA
B22
GND
A3
KB_CLK
A23
PP_INIT_L
B3
MS_CLK
B23
SP1_RTS_L
A4
+5V
A24
PP_ERR_L
B4
SIN_TTL_XIMB
B24
SP0_CTS_L
A5
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
A25
PP_AFD_L
B5
SIN_TTL_COM2
B25
SP1_CTS_L
A6
PP_SLCT
A26
I2C_BMC_SCL
B6
SP0_DCD_L
B26
RTL_TTL_FP_L
A7
PP_PE
A27
DSR_TTL_FP
B7
SP1_DCD_L
B27
DTR_TTL_FP_L
A8
PP_BUSY
A28
CTS_TTL_FP
B8
SP0_SIN
B28
DCD_TTL_FP_L
A9
PP_ACK_L
A29
RT_TTL_FP
B9
GND
B29
I2C_BMC_SDA
A10
GND
A30
COM2_TO_STD_EN
B10
SP1_SIN
B30
XIMB_SOUT_EN
A11
PP_DR7
A31
COM2_TO_FP_EN
B11
SP0_RI_L
B31
SOUT_TTL_COM2
A12
PP_DR6
A32
GND
B12
SP1_RI_L
B32
PWR_GOOD
A13
PP_DR5
A33
GND
B13
GND
B33
GND
A14
PP_DR4
A34
GND
B14
SP0_DTR_L
B34
GND
A15
GND
A35
V_BLUE
B15
SP1_DTR_L
B35
V_VSYNC
A16
PP_DR3
A36
GND
B16
SP0_SOUT
B36
GND
A17
PP_DR2
A37
V_GREEN
B17
SP1_SOUT
B37
V_HSYNC
A18
PP_DR1
A38
GND
B18
No connection
B38
GND
A19
PP_DR0
A39
V_RED
B19
SP0_DSR_L
B39
VR_DDCDAT
A20
GND
A40
GND
B20
SP1_DSR_L
B40
VR_DDCCLK
USB Port
OM06248
212
Pin
Signal
Description
A1
VCC
Overcurrent monitor line port 0
A2
DATAL0
Differential data line paired with DATAH0
A3
DATAH0
Differential data line paired with DATAL0
A4
GND
Ground potential
B1
VCC
Overcurrent monitor line port 1
B2
DATAL1
Differential data line paired with DATAH1
B3
DATAH1
Differential data line paired with DATAL1
B4
GND
Ground potential
Pin
Signal
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Keyboard and Mouse Ports
These identical PS/2 compatible ports share a common housing. The top one is the mouse, and the
bottom one is the keyboard.
6
5
4
3
2
1
OM00951A
Mouse
Keyboard
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
MSEDAT (mouse data)
1
KEYDAT (keyboard data)
2
No connection
2
No connection
3
GND (Ground)
3
GND (Ground)
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)
5
MSECLK (mouse clock)
5
KEYCLK (keyboard clock)
6
No connection
6
No connection
Serial Ports
These ports support external devices such as modems and scanners that require serial data
transmission.
1
6
5
9
OM00932A
Pin
Signal
1
DCD (data carrier detect)
2
RXD (receive data)
3
TXD (transmit data)
4
DTR (data terminal ready)
5
GND (Ground)
6
DSR (data set ready)
7
RTS (request to send)
8
CTS (clear to send)
9
RIA (ring indicator)
213
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Parallel Port
The IEEE 1284-compatible parallel port—used primarily for a printer—sends data in parallel
format.
13
1
25
14
OM00933A
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
STROBE_L
14
AUFDXT_L (auto feed)
2
Data bit 0
15
ERROR_L
3
Data bit 1
16
INIT_L (initialize printer)
4
Data bit 2
17
SLCTIN_L (select input)
5
Data bit 3
18
GND (Ground)
6
Data bit 4
19
GND
7
Data bit 5
20
GND
8
Data bit 6
21
GND
9
Data bit 7
22
GND
10
ACK_L (acknowledge)
23
GND
11
BUSY
24
GND
12
PE (paper end)
25
GND
13
SLCT (select)
ICMB Connectors
The ICMB device provides external access to the ICMB devices that are within the chassis. This
makes it possible to externally access chassis management functions, alert logs, post-mortem data,
etc. The device also provides a mechanism for chassis power control. The server provides two
SEMCONN 6-pin connectors to allow daisy-chained cabling.
OM06193A
214
Pin
Signal
1
No connection
2
No connection
3
+ (positive)
4
- (negative)
5
No connection
6
No connection
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
VGA Video Port
5
1
10
6
15
11
OM00936A
Pin
Signal
1
Red (analog color signal R)
2
Green (analog color signal G)
3
Blue (analog color signal B)
4
No connection
5
GND (video ground, shield)
6–8
GND (video ground, shield)
9
No connection
10
GND (video ground)
11–12
No connection
13
HSYNC (horizontal sync)
14
VSYNC (vertical sync)
15
No connection
215
White text
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting
Configuration Jumpers
This chapter describes the CPU baseboard and tells how to use the jumpers.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
CPU Baseboard Features
The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I/O baseboard and memory modules through the
midplane. The CPU baseboard provides
•
•
•
•
•
four Slot 2 type connectors for processors packaged in Single Edge Contact (S.E.C.) cartridges
an onboard DC-to-DC converter that supplies VTTvoltage for the CPU baseboard and memory
modules
four sockets for VRM8.3 converters that supply core voltage for the processors
two sockets for VRM8.3 converters that supply L2 cache voltage for the processors
I2C, serial peripheral interface (SPI), and in-system programming (ISP) server management
interfaces
In a symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) environment, all processors are equal and have no
preassigned tasks. Distributing the processing loads among processors increases server
performance. This is particularly useful when application demand is low and the I/O request load
is high. In an SMP environment, the processors share a common bus, the same interrupt structure,
and access to common memory and I/O channels. The SMP implementation conforms to the
Multiprocessor Specification Version 1.4.
The onboard PCI and memory controller (PMC) supports from 128 MB to 8 GB of ECC memory,
either fast page mode (FPM) or extended data out (EDO) 3.3 V 50 or 60 ns DRAMs, mounted on
JEDEC DIMMs.
Processors
The processor core and L2 cache components are mounted inside the S.E.C. cartridge. It plugs
into one of the four Slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard.
217
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Memory Interface
The memory subsystem consists of two memory modules installed in the two memory connectors
on the midplane. The memory modules interface with the CPU baseboard through the midplane via
the grand connector. The grand connector provides connectivity between the CPU baseboard, the
PHP I/O baseboard, and memory modules through two 270-pin connectors and one 240-pin
connector.
Each memory module contains sixteen 72-bit wide DIMM sockets that can provide up to 4 GB of
EDO memory per module. The memory bus uses gunning transceiver logic (AGTL)+ signaling
technology. Because the bus must be terminated on each end, both memory connectors must
contain a memory module; however, only one memory module must be populated with memory.
DC-to-DC Voltage Converters
The plug-in VRM8.3 DC to DC converters, on the CPU baseboard, supply voltage for the
processors and the L2 caches. All the converters convert off the +12 V supply rail.
•
•
Four converters supply voltage for the four processor cores.
Two converters supply voltage for the four processor L2 caches (two L2 caches share one
converter).
An onboard switching converter provides the 1.5 V AGTL+ termination voltage (VTT) required by
the CPU baseboard, memory modules, and processors. A second onboard linear converter
provides +2.5 V for the logic on the CPU baseboard (clock buffers and voltage shifters). Both
converters use the +5 V supply rail as source voltage.
DS1624 SEEPROM
When the DS1624 on the CPU baseboard is accessed via the I2C bus, it provides a temperature
reading of the ambient temperature of the CPU baseboard. The DS1624 also provides:
•
•
•
•
•
218
time and date the CPU baseboard was manufactured
name of the board manufacturer
name and description of the board
serial number of the board
part number of the board
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
I/O Interface
The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I/O baseboard and memory modules through the
grand connector on the midplane. The I/O interface portion of the grand connector provides the
primary and secondary expander buses, server management signals, front panel signals, and legacy
signals. The expander buses provide source-synchronous, high-speed bidirectional point-to-point
links between the CPU baseboard and the PHP I/O baseboard. Each expander bus has enough
bandwidth for two 32-bit, 33 MHz PCI buses or one 64-bit, 33 MHz PCI bus. The expander buses
use AGTL+ signaling technology.
Front Side Bus
The front side bus (FSB) is an ECC protected 64-bit bus that uses GTL+ signaling technology; it
runs at 100 MHz. The FSB requires termination modules in each unused Slot 2 connector. When
installing processors, always install them in sequence by starting with processor connector 1, then
connector 2, and so on—bottom connector to top connector. For example, in a dual processor
server, connectors 1 and 2 contain processors while connectors 3 and 4 contain terminator
modules.
Front Side Bus Terminator Module
The FSB terminator module provides:
•
•
the necessary termination for the AGTL+ signals on the FSB
correct handling of JTAG scan signals
219
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers
The J31 jumper block
•
•
•
controls the VRMs and server management outputs
determines core to bus ratio
provides parking spaces for unused jumpers
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
J31
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
A
B
OM07314
Figure 18-1. J31 Jumper Block
Table 18-1. J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management
Pins 1 and 2
Pins 3 and 4
Status
1
1
Disable VRMs
1
0
Reserved
0
1
Disable Server Management
0
0
Default/Normal Operation
Key: 0 = open; 1 = closed
220
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Installing jumpers across pins 5 and 6, 7 and 8, and 9 and 10 determines the processor core-to-FSB
frequency ratios. The bus frequency is 100 MHz. The core frequencies are based on the 100 MHz
bus frequency.
Table 18-2. J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios
Pins 5 and 6
Pins 7 and 8
Pins 9 and 10
Bus Ratio
Core Frequency (MHz)
1
1
1
Reserved
1
1
0
9:2
450
1
0
1
7:2
350
1
0
0
Reserved
0
1
1
5:1
500
0
1
0
4:1
400
0
0
1
3:1
300
0
0
0
Reserved
Key: 0 = open; 1 = closed
The jumper block provides three parking positions for storing the jumpers. They can be parked
across pins 11 and 12, 13 and 14, and 15 and 16.
Changing a Jumper Setting
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the top and left side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
4. From the tables above, determine which jumper you need to move. Then move it to the new
location.
5. Reinstall the top and right side covers.
6. Plug in the power cord, turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. See Chapter 3,
“Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”
7. Run the SSU to reconfigure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to
Run.”
221
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
CPU Baseboard Layout
A B
C
D
E
F
O
N
G
M
L
K
J
I
H
OM07312
Figure 18-2. CPU Baseboard Layout
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
222
J31, Jumper block
J3, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #2 (processor core power only)
J1, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #1 (processor core power only)
J2, VRM connector provides power for processor slots #1 and #2 (L2 cache power only)
J5, VRM connector provides power for processor slots #3 and #4 (L2 cache power only)
Memory interface connectors
I/O connector
Power connectors
J4, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #3 (processor core power only)
J6, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #4 (processor core power only)
Processor slot #4
Processor slot #3
Processor slot #2
Processor slot #1
J32, Front panel connector
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
CPU Baseboard Connectors
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20:Rows A, B, and C
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
MD_L(35)
A1
GND
B1
MD_L(34)
C1
GND
A2
MD_L(32)
B2
GND
C2
MD_L(30)
A3
GND
B3
DSTBN_L(1)
C3
GND
A4
MD_L(28)
B4
GND
C4
MD_L(26)
A5
GND
B5
DSTBP_L(1)
C5
GND
A6
MD_L(24)
B6
GND
C6
MD_L(22)
A7
GND
B7
MD_L(21)
C7
GND
A8
GND
B8
GND
C8
MUXCLK0[A,B]
A9
GND
B9
MD_L(17)
C9
GND
A10
GND
B10
GND
C10
MRESET_L
A11
GND
B11
Reserved
C11
GND
A12
MD_L(16)
B12
GND
C12
MD_L(14)
A13
GND
B13
MD_L(13)
C13
GND
A14
MD_L(11)
B14
GND
C14
MD_L(9)
A15
GND
B15
DSTBP_L(0)
C15
GND
A16
MD_L(7)
B16
GND
C16
MD_L(5)
A17
GND
B17
DSTBN_L(0)
C17
GND
A18
MD_L(3)
B18
GND
C18
MD_L(2)
A19
GND
B19
MD_L(1)
C19
GND
A20
MD_L(0)
B20
GND
C20
MEM[A,B]_ TCK
A21
GND
B21
MEMA_TDI
C21
GND
A22
MEM[A,B]_ TRST_L
B22
GND
C22
MA_(12)
A23
GND
B23
MA_L(11)
C23
GND
A24
MA_L(9)
B24
GND
C24
MA_L(7)
A25
GND
B25
MA_L(6)
C25
GND
A26
MA_L(4)
B26
GND
C26
MA_L(3)
A27
GND
B27
MA_L(2)
C27
GND
A28
MA_L(1)
B28
GND
C28
MA_L(0)
A29
GND
B29
CSTB_L
C29
GND
A30
CMND1_L
B30
GND
C30
BANK1_L
A31
GND
B31
BANK2_L
C31
GND
A32
CARD[0,1]_L
B32
GND
C32
continued
223
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows A, B, & C (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
PHIT[A,B]_L
A33
GND
B33
RCMPLT [A,B]_L
C33
GND
A34
RHIT[A,B]_L
B34
GND
C34
Reserved
A35
GND
B35
Reserved
C35
GND
A36
MD_L(71)
B36
GND
C36
MD_L(69)
A37
GND
B37
MD_L(68)
C37
GND
A38
MD_L(66)
B38
GND
C38
MD_L(64)
A39
GND
B39
DSTBN_L(3)
C39
GND
A40
MD_L(62)
B40
GND
C40
MD_L(60)
A41
GND
B41
DSTBP_L(3)
C41
GND
A42
GND
B42
GND
C42
MUXCLK1 [A,B]
A43
GND
B43
MD_L(56)
C43
GND
A44
GND
B44
GND
C44
MD_L(54)
A45
GND
B45
Reserved
C45
GND
A46
Reserved
B46
GND
C46
MD_L(53)
A47
GND
B47
MD_L(52)
C47
GND
A48
MD_L(50)
B48
GND
C48
MD_L(48)
A49
GND
B49
DSTBP_L(2)
C49
GND
A50
MD_L(46)
B50
GND
C50
MD_L(44)
A51
GND
B51
DSTBN_L(2)
C51
GND
A52
MD_L(42)
B52
GND
C52
MD_L(40)
A53
GND
B53
MD_L(39)
C53
GND
A54
MD_L(37)
B54
GND
C54
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows D & E
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
MD_L(31)
GND
MD_L(27)
GND
MD_L(23)
GND
MD_L(19)
GND
Reserved
GND
MD_L(15)
GND
MD_L(10)
GND
MD_L(6)
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
MD_L(33)
+1.5V
MD_L(29)
GND
MD_L(25)
+1.5V
MD_L(20)
GND
MD_L(18)
GND
Reserved
+1.5V
MD_L(12)
GND
MD_L(8)
+1.5V
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
continued
224
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows D & E (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
D17
MD_L(4)
E17
GND
D18
GND
E18
GND
D19
RCGCLK1 [A,B]
E19
GND
D20
GND
E20
GND
D21
MEM[A,B]_TMS
E21
GND
D22
MA_L(13)
E22
GND
D23
MA_L(10)
E23
MA_L(8)
D24
+1.5V
E24
GND
D25
MA_L(5)
E25
GND
D26
GND
E26
GND
D27
RCGCLK0-[A,B]
E27
GND
D28
GND
E28
GND
D29
ROW_L
E29
BANK0_L
D30
+1.5V
E30
GND
D31
CMND0_L
E31
GND
D32
GND
E32
GND
D33
SDRAM [A,B]_CLK
E33
GND
D34
GND
E34
GND
D35
Reserved
E35
MD_L(70)
D36
Reserved
E36
GND
D37
MD_L(67)
E37
MD_L(65)
D38
+1.5V
E38
GND
D39
MD_L(63)
E39
MD_L(61)
D40
GND
E40
GND
D41
MD_L(59)
E41
MD_L(58)
D42
GND
E42
GND
D43
MD_L(57)
E43
MD_L(55)
D44
GND
E44
GND
D45
Reserved
E45
Reserved
D46
+1.5V
E46
GND
D47
MD_L(51)
E47
MD_L(49)
D48
GND
E48
GND
D49
MD_L(47)
E49
MD_L(45)
D50
+1.5V
E50
GND
D51
MD_L(43)
E51
MD_L(41)
D52
GND
E52
GND
D53
MD_L(38)
E53
MD_L(36)
D54
+1.5V
E54
225
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
I/O Connector
I/O Connector, J22: Rows A, B, & C
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
X1CLK
A1
5V_RET_ SENSE
B1
GND
C1
GND
A2
GND
B2
5V_SENSE
C2
X1D_L(15)
A3
X1D_L(13)
B3
GND
C3
X1D_L(14)
A4
GND
B4
X1XSTBN_L
C4
X1D_L(12)
A5
X1D_L(10)
B5
X1BE_L(1)
C5
GND
A6
GND
B6
X1D_L(11)
C6
X1D_L(9)
A7
X1D_L(7)
B7
X1ADS_L
C7
X1D_L(8)
A8
GND
B8
GND
C8
X1D_L(6)
A9
X1D_L(5)
B9
X1PAR_L
C9
GND
A10
GND
B10
GND
C10
X1D_L(4)
A11
X1D_L(2)
B11
X1BE_L(0)
C11
X1D_L(3)
A12
GND
B12
GND
C12
X1D_L(1)
A13
X1XRTS_L
B13
X1HRTS_L
C13
X1D_L(0)
A14
GND
B14
GND
C14
GND
A15
DS2P_I2C_SDA
B15
DS2P_I2C_ SCL
C15
I2C_FPC_SDA
A16
GND
B16
GND
C16
I2C_FPC_SCL
A17
VCC_ STDBY
B17
HARD_ RESET
C17
VCC_ STDBY
A18
GND
B18
GND
C18
ISP_SDI
A19
FAN_ FAILED_L
B19
SPEAKER_ DATA
C19
INTRUSION_L
A20
GND
B20
DTR_TTL_FP
C20
ISP_SDO
A21
RTS_TTL_FP
B21
GND
C21
RI_TTL_ FP
A22
GND
B22
ISP_FPC_ SDO
C22
CTS_TTL_FP
A23
ISP_CONNECTOR_SCLK
B23
GND
C23
GND
A24
GND
B24
RESERVED
C24
X0CLK
A25
DSR_TTL_FP
B25
GND
C25
GND
A26
GND
B26
ISP_HSBP_ SDO
C26
X0D_L(15)
A27
X0D_L(13)
B27
GND
C27
X0D_L(14)
A28
GND
B28
X0XSTBN_L
C28
X0D_L(12)
A29
X0D_L(10)
B29
X0BE_L(1)
C29
GND
A30
GND
B30
X0D_L(11)
C30
X0D_L(9)
A31
X0D_L(7)
B31
X0ADS_L
C31
X0D_L(8)
A32
GND
B32
GND
C32
X0D_L(6)
A33
X0D_L(5)
B33
X0PAR_L
C33
GND
A34
GND
B34
GND
C34
X0D_L(4)
A35
X0D_L(2)
B35
X0BE_L(0)
C35
X0D_L(3)
A36
GND
B36
GND
C36
continued
226
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
I/O Connector, J22: Rows A, B, & C (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
X0D_L(1)
A37
X0XRTS_L
B37
X0HRTS_L
C37
X0D_L(0)
A38
GND
B38
GND
C38
GND
A39
IGNNE_L
B39
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA
C39
NMI_5V
A40
GND
B40
SMI_L
C40
I2C_BMC_SDA
A41
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)
B41
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)
C41
I2C_BMC_SCL
A42
GND
B42
GND
C42
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)
A43
CPU_CPI_RESET_L
B43
PROC_ RESET_L
C43
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)
A44
GND
B44
A20M_L
C44
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)
A45
IO_TDI
B45
PWRGDB
C45
IO_TDO
A46
GND
B46
IO_TMS
C46
IO_TCK
A47
XIMB_ SOUT_ENT
B47
SIN_TTL_ COM2
C47
COM2_TO_FP_EN
A48
GND
B48
GND
C48
I/O Connector, J22: Rows D & E
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
X1HSTBN_L
D1
GND
E1
X1HSTBP_L
D2
GND
E2
GND
D3
GND
E3
X1XSTBP_L
D4
RESERVED
E4
GND
D5
GND
E5
I2C_BACKUP_SDA
D6
MIOC_INTREQ_L
E6
GND
D7
GND
E7
I2C_BACKUP_SCL
D8
X1RST_L
E8
GND
D9
GND
E9
I2C_CEL_ CONNECT
D10
X1BLK_L
E10
GND
D11
GND
E11
PWR_CNTRL_RTC
D12
I2C_CEL_ CONNECT_FPC
E12
GND
D13
GND
E13
FP_NMI_SWT_L
D14
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L
E14
PS_PWR_ON
D15
GND
E15
X1IB_L
D16
PWR_GOOD
E16
RESERVED
D17
GND
E17
FP_TO_PIIX4_PWR
D18
SECURE_MODE_BMC
E18
GND
D19
GND
E19
ISP_EN2_L
D20
CPU_SLP_L
E20
-12V
D21
GND
E21
ISP_FPC_EN_L
D22
-12V
E22
continued
227
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
I/OConnector, J22: Rows D & E (continued)
228
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
ISP_SCLK
D23
GND
E23
ISP_MODE
D24
ISP_EN_L
E24
X0HSTBN_L
D25
GND
E25
X0HSTBP_L
D26
GND
E26
GND
D27
GND
E27
X0XSTBP_L
D28
DCD_TTL_FP
E28
GND
D29
GND
E29
SOUT_TTL_ COM2
D30
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
E30
GND
D31
GND
E31
SIN_TTL_ XIMB
D32
X0RST_L
E32
GND
D33
GND
E33
RESERVED
D34
X0BLK_L
E34
GND
D35
GND
E35
RESET_HSBP_L
D36
FERR_L
E36
GND
D37
GND
E37
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL
D38
INTR
E38
IO_PWRGD
D39
RESERVED
E39
X0IB_L
D40
RESERVED
E40
GND
D41
GND
E41
BMC_SPI_ BUS(2)
D42
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)
E42
GND
D43
GND
E43
INIT_L
D44
RESET_PWR_ DIST_L
E44
PICD(0)
D45
GND
E45
IO_TRST_L
D46
PICD(1)
E46
STPCLK_L
D47
GND
E47
COM2_TO_ SIO_EN
D48
PIC_CLK
E48
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Power Connectors
Power Connectors, J21B, J21C, J12D, J24B, J24C, and J24D
J21B
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+12V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+12V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+12V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+12V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+12V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+12V
P2E3
+3.3V
J21C
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+3.3V
J21D
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+3.3V
J24B
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+3.3V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+3.3V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+3.3V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+3.3V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+3.3V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+3.3V
229
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Power Connectors, J21B, J21C, J12D, J24B, J24C, and J24D (continued)
J24C
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+5V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+5V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+5V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+5V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+5V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+5V
J24D
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
P1A1
GND
P1B1
GND
P1C1
+12V
P1D1
+5V
P1E1
+5V
P1A2
GND
P1B2
GND
P1C2
+12V
P1D2
+5V
P1E2
+5V
P1A3
GND
P1B3
GND
P1C3
+12V
P1D3
+5V
P1E3
+5V
P2A1
GND
P2B1
GND
P2C1
+12V
P2D1
+5V
P2E1
+5V
P2A2
GND
P2B2
GND
P2C2
+12V
P2D2
+5V
P2E2
+5V
P2A3
GND
P2B3
GND
P2C3
+12V
P2D3
+5V
P2E3
+5V
Front Panel Connector
Front Panel Connector, J32
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
1
GND
41
+12V
2
-12V
42
+12V
3
+12V
43
GND
4
GND
44
GND
5
GND
45
+12V
6
+12V
46
+12V
7
+12V
47
SPEAKER_DATA
8
GND
48
ISP_SCLK
9
GND
49
FAN_FAILED_L
10
+5V
50
GND
11
ISP_SDI
51
ISP_FPC_EN_L
12
+5V
52
FP_TO_PIIX_PWRBTN
13
ISP_MODE
53
ISP_FPC_SDO
14
+5V
54
Reserved
15
Reserved
55
COM2_TO_FP_EN
16
+5V
56
COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A
17
PROC_RESET_L
57
GND
18
Reserved
58
SECURE_MODE_BMC
19
XIMB_SOUT_EN
59
continued
230
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers
Front Panel Connector, J32 (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
HARD_RESET
20
GND
60
FP_NMI_SWT_L
21
Reserved
61
SIN_TTL_COM2
22
Reserved
62
SIN_TTL_XIMB
23
Reserved
63
GND
24
GND
64
SOUT_TTL_XIMB
25
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L
65
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L
26
SOUT_TTL_COM2
66
GND
27
GND
67
PS_PWR_ON
28
PWR_GOOD
68
DSR_TTL_FP
29
DCD_TTL_FP
69
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC
30
GND
70
CTS_TTL_FP
31
Reserved
71
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A
32
Reserved
72
I2C_FPC_SCL
33
RI_TTL_FP
73
I2C_FPC_SDA
34
Reserved
74
GND
35
RTS_TTL_FP
75
GND
36
DTR_TTL_FP
76
I2C_BACKUP_SDA
37
I2C_BACKUP_SCL
77
VCC_STDBY
38
VCC_STDBY
78
VCC_STDBY
39
VCC_STDBY
79
Reserved
40
GND
80
231
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding
Memory
This chapter describes the memory module and tells how to populate the DIMM sockets on the
memory module.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Module Features
Memory module:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72-bit dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
60 ns and 50 ns, 3.3 V, buffered EDO DRAM
Four-way interleaving
A minimum configuration of 128 MB using four 32 MB DIMMs
Supports buffered DIMMs with capacities of 32, 64, and 256 MB
Provides server management data with an onboard EEPROM, including thermal monitoring,
FRU information, and presence-detect bit access
Can act as a memory terminator module when not populated with DIMMs
You must install two high-capacity DRAM memory modules and one of them must be populated
with DIMMs.
ECC memory detects and corrects single-bit errors from DRAM in real time, allowing your server
to function normally despite data transmission errors. ECC detects all double-bit errors but does
not correct them; it also detects, but does not correct, three-bit and four-bit adjacent errors in a
DRAM nibble. Single-bit errors are reported down to the exact bit within DIMM. Multiple-bit
errors are reported down to an interleave which corresponds to a single DIMM.
233
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
EDO DRAM Array
The extended data out (EDO) DRAM array on the memory module consists of sixteen 72-bit
(64-bit data plus 8 ECC bits) DIMM sockets. They are divided into four memory banks, A–D, of
four sockets each. These banks support only 4:1 interleaving (DIMMs in all four sockets). For
example, in bank A socket
•
•
•
•
J1 contains interleave 0
J2 contains interleave 1
J3 contains interleave 2
J4 contains interleave 3
Because each interleave provides access to 72 bits of data, 4:1 interleaving yields 288 bits
(32 bytes) per DRAM transaction—one cache line for the processor. If the CPU baseboard
contains two 4:1 interleaving memory modules, successive DRAM transactions occurring in the
different memory modules complete at a maximum rate of one transaction every 30 ns. This yields
a maximum data rate of 1.067 GB per second.
Although several DIMM population options are available, the following table lists the populations
that should be used to add memory to the system.
Table 19-1. Memory Module DIMM Support
Category
Supported DIMM Variety
Speed
50 ns, 60 ns
Capacity/Organization/Refresh
32 MB: 16 Mbit, 4Mx4 DRAM; 2 K or 4 K refresh*
64 MB: 64 Mbit, 8Mx8 DRAM; 4 K refresh*
256 MB: Double-high; 64 Mbit, 16Mx4 DRAM; 4K or 8K refresh*
Voltage
3.3 V
Data Width
x72 (ECC)
Page Mode
EDO
Buffered/Non
Buffered
Maximum Height
2.4 inches
DRAM Package
TSSOP
* The memory module supports only CAS-before-RAS refresh. When selecting a module, make sure that the target
refresh number corresponds to CBR refresh.
All DIMMs within a given bank must be identical. From bank to bank, the 450NX PCI chipset
supports different varieties of DIMM sizes, manufacturers, and speeds.
Only configuration adhering to the following rules are validated, and they are the only
configuration that are fully supported:
•
•
•
•
234
All DIMMs within a given back must be identical.
Install 32, 64, and 256 MB DIMMs in the memory banks.
The total number of DIMMs on both memory modules: 4, 8, 16, 24, or 32 (two memory
module configuration).
The total number of DIMMs using only one memory module must be: 4, 8, 12, or 16 (one
memory module and one memory terminator configuration).
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
•
•
•
Install an equal number of DIMMs on each memory module, in the two memory module
configuration, except when only four DIMMs are used. In that case, all four DIMMs are on
the primary memory module installed in primary connector on the midplane.
All DIMMs on a memory module are identical in size and speed.
DIMMs may differ in size and speed between memory modules. However, the maximum data
transfer rate can only be provided when the banks of each module are configured identically
(through module-to-module interleaving as indicated in the rules below).
To take advantage of address bit permuting (ABP), which increases memory access performance
across sequential cache line accesses, the following rules must be followed:
•
•
•
•
•
All banks that are used must be populated with four DIMMs.
There must be a power of two banks populated (2, 4, 8, or 16).
All banks in an ABP group (two banks in 2-bank permuting or four banks in 4-bank
permuting) must be the same size.
All populated banks must be adjacent and start at bank 0.
When it is required that both memory modules be in the server, both must be configured to
allow equivalent ABP settings. For example, the chip set cannot support 2-bank permuting on
one module and 4-bank permuting on the other.
To take advantage of module-to-module interleaving, which provides maximum performance
across sequential cache line accesses, the following rules must be followed:
•
•
All ABP rules above must be followed.
Two memory modules must used, and corresponding banks must be identically populated with
DIMMs of the same size and type.
Before allowing the processors to come out of reset, server management firmware scans the
presence-detect bits of all DIMMs installed on the memory modules. If they are 50-ns DIMMs,
then server management changes the value of the chipset’s DRAM speed-mode bit. The default
value on this bit is a high voltage level, which corresponds to 60-ns timings; changing the value to
a low voltage level places this bit in the 50-ns mode. Changing the value of the bit can only be
effected by software, and it must be before the processors come out of reset. If the bit changes
while a memory access is in process, the results are unpredictable. After deciding the value of the
bit and making any necessary changes, server management may proceed with processor reset.
While changing this bit will not increase the theoretical maximum bandwidth, it will decrease
initial latency of DRAM reads by one clock and increase bandwidth of consecutive page misses.
When installing less than 16 DIMMs on a memory module, there is a preferred order for
populating the DIMM sockets to maintain optimal signal integrity. When installing two memory
modules on the CPU baseboard, you should always alternate DIMM installation between memory
modules. For instance, when installing 16 DIMMs in the system, the quantities should be divided
such that eight fill the first two banks of one module and eight more fill the same two banks in the
second module. See the DIMM interleave configurations in Figures 19-1 through 19-3.
235
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
J1
J2
A
J5
J6
J9
J10
J13
J14
B
C
D
J3
J4
A
J7
J8
J11
J12
J15
J16
B
C
D
OM07332
Figure 19-1. 4:1 Interleave With Four DIMMs
A.
B.
236
Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)
Bank B, J5-J8 (empty)
C. Bank C, J9-J12 (empty)
D. Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
J1
J2
J5
J6
A
B
J9
J10
J13
J14
C
D
J3
J4
J7
J8
A
B
J11
J12
J15
J16
C
D
OM07340
Figure 19-2. 4:1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs
A.
B.
Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)
Bank B, J5-J8 (populated)
C.
D.
Bank C, J9-J12 (empty)
Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)
237
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
J1
J2
J5
J6
J9
J10
A
B
C
J13
J14
D
J3
J4
J7
J8
J11
J12
A
B
C
J15
J16
D
OM07341
Figure 19-3. 4:1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs
A.
B.
238
Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)
Bank B, J5-J8 (populated)
C.
D.
Bank C, J9-J12 (populated)
Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
Memory Module Layout
J1
J2
J5
J6
J9
J10
J13
J14
A
B
C
D
J3
J4
J7
J8
J11
J12
J15
J16
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
G
OM07307
Figure 19-4. Memory Module Layout
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
J1-J4, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank A
J5-J8, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank B
J9-J12, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank C
J13-J16, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank D
U6E2, DS1624, I2C EEPROM and temperature sensor (package)
J21 memory interface connector
Eject/insert levers
239
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Installing DIMMs
CAUTION
DIMM devices with gold contacts should not be installed in DIMM sockets
with tin-lead contacts or vice versa. Mixing dissimilar metal contacts types
has been shown to result in unreliable memory operation.
To avoid potential memory problems, use only DIMMs from JEDEC-compatible manufacturers
that have been tested for compatibility with the memory module. Contact your sales representative
or dealer for a list of approved DIMMs.
See Figures 19-5 and 19-6.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13, "Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling."
4. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, place the module
DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.
5. Hold the DIMM only by the edges as you remove the DIMM from the antistatic package.
6. Beginning with bank A (Figure 19-5), socket J1, orient the DIMM so that the two notches in
the bottom edge align with the keyed socket.
OM07320
Figure 19-5. DIMM Orientation
240
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
CAUTION
Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying too much pressure can
damage the socket slot. DIMMs are keyed such that they can be inserted in
only one way.
7. Insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into socket J1, and press down firmly on the DIMM until
it seats correctly (Figure 19-6).
OM06767
Figure 19-6. Properly Seated DIMM
8. Repeat the above steps to install more DIMMs. Always install them in sequence by installing
the next DIMM in bank A, socket J2 and so on, with the last one in bank D, socket J16.
9. Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13.
10. Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.
11. Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server.
12. Turn on your monitor and then your server.
13. Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory. Failure to do so
may degrade the performance of your server. For information about running the SSU, see
Chapter 5, "System Setup Utility: When to Run."
241
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Removing DIMMs
See Figure 19-7.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13, "Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling."
4. Starting with the first DIMM-filled socket closest to the top edge of the module, remove the
DIMMs one at a time.
CAUTION
Use extreme care when removing a DIMM. Too much pressure can damage
the socket slot. Apply only enough pressure on the plastic ejector levers to
release the DIMM.
5. Gently push the plastic ejector levers out and down to eject the DIMM from the socket
(Figure 19-7).
6. Carefully lift the DIMM away from the socket, and store it in an antistatic package.
7. Repeat the above steps to remove other DIMMs.
OM06768
Figure 19-7. Removing DIMMs
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
242
Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13.
Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.
Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server.
Turn on your monitor and then your server.
Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory. Failure to do so
may degrade the performance of your server. For information about running the SSU, see
Chapter 5, "System Setup Utility: When to Run."
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
System Management Interface
The devices on I2C bus of the memory module provide system management software with module
operating temperature, DIMM configuration, and field replacement unit (FRU) data. The devices
also provide
•
•
•
•
•
time and date the module was manufactured
name of the module manufacturer
name and description of the module
serial number of the module
part number of the module
243
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Memory Module Connector
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
A1
MD36_L
B1
GND
C1
GDCMPLT_L
A2
VCC
B2
DSTBN2_L
C2
GND
A3
MD39_L
B3
GND
C3
MD41_L
A4
VCC
B4
DSTBP2_L
C4
GND
A5
MD43_L
B5
GND
C5
MD45_L
A6
VCC
B6
MD46_L
C6
GND
A7
MD48_L
B7
GND
C7
MD50_L
A8
VCC
B8
MD51_L
C8
GND
A9
MD53_L
B9
GND
C9
VTT
A10
VCC
B10
MD54_L
C10
GND
A11
GND
B11
VTT
C11
MUXCLK1
A12
GND
B12
MD56_L
C12
GND
A13
GND
B13
VTT
C13
MD59_L
A14
VCC
B14
DSTBP3_L
C14
GND
A15
MD61_L
B15
GND
C15
MD63_L
A16
VCC
B16
DSTBN3_L
C16
GND
A17
MD65_L
B17
GND
C17
VTT
A18
VCC
B18
MD67_L
C18
GND
A19
MD69_L
B19
GND
C19
MD71_L
A20
VCC
B20
VTT
C20
GND
A21
NC
B21
GND
C21
VTT
A22
VCC
B22
CARD_NUM
C22
GND
A23
GND
B23
VTT
C23
SPAREKCLK1
A24
GND
B24
PHIT_L
C24
GND
A25
GND
B25
VTT
C25
WDEVT_L
A26
VCC
B26
RCMPLT_L
C26
GND
A27
CMND0_L
B27
GND
C27
DCMPLT_L
A28
VCC
B28
BANK0_L
C28
GND
A29
BANK2_L
B29
GND
C29
DVALID_L
A30
VCC
B30
ROW_L
C30
GND
A31
MA0_L
B31
VTT
C31
DOFF0_L
A32
GND
B32
MA2_L
C32
GND
A33
MA4_L
B33
VTT
C33
DOFF1_L
A34
VCC
B34
MA6_L
C34
GND
A35
MA8_L
B35
GND
C35
DSEL_L
A36
VCC
B36
MA10_L
C36
GND
A37
GND
B37
GND
C37
RCGCLK
A38
GND
B38
MA13_L
C38
continued
244
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
Memory Module Connector: A, B, & C (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
A39
GND
B39
VTT
C39
SPARECLK0
A40
GND
B40
NC
C40
GND
A41
GND
B41
VTT
C41
MD0_L
A42
VCC
B42
MD1_L
C42
GND
A43
MD3_L
B43
GND
C43
MD5_L
A44
VCC
B44
DSTBN0_L
C44
GND
A45
MD7_L
B45
GND
C45
MD9_L
A46
VCC
B46
DSTBP0_L
C46
GND
A47
MD11_L
B47
GND
C47
MD13_L
A48
VCC
B48
MD14_L
C48
GND
A49
TDI
B49
GND
C49
MD16_L
A50
VCC
B50
TRST_L
C50
GND
A51
GND
B51
VTT
C51
MUXCLK0
A52
GND
B52
MD18_L
C52
GND
A53
GND
B53
VTT
C53
MD21_L
A54
VCC
B54
MD22_L
C54
GND
A55
MD24_L
B55
GND
C55
MD26_L
A56
VCC
B56
DSTBP1_L
C56
GND
A57
MD28_L
B57
GND
C57
GDCMPLT_L
A58
VCC
B58
DSTBN1_L
C58
GND
A59
MD31_L
B59
GND
C59
MD33_L
A60
VCC
B60
MD34_L
C60
Memory Module Connector: D & E
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
MD37_L
D1
VCC
E1
GND
D2
MD38_L
E2
MD40_L
D3
VCC
E3
GND
D4
MD42_L
E4
MD44_L
D5
VCC
E5
GND
D6
MD47_L
E6
MD49_L
D7
VCC
E7
GND
D8
MD52_L
E8
TDO
D9
VCC
E9
GND
D10
VCC
E10
MD55_L
D11
VCC
E11
GND
D12
MD57_L
E12
MD58_L
D13
VCC
E13
GND
D14
MD60_L
E14
continued
245
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Memory Module Connector: D & E (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
MD62_L
D15
VCC
E15
GND
D16
MD64_L
E16
MD66_L
D17
VCC
E17
GND
D18
MD68_L
E18
MD70_L
D19
VCC
E19
GND
D20
VCC
E20
NC
D21
VCC
E21
GND
D22
I2C_BMC_SCL
E22
PWRGD
D23
VCC
E23
GND
D24
I2C_BMC_SDA
E24
RHIT_L
D25
VCC
E25
GND
D26
GRCMPLT_L
E26
CARD_L
D27
VCC
E27
GND
D28
BANK1_L
E28
CMND1_L
D29
VCC
E29
GND
D30
CSTB_L
E30
MA1_L
D31
VCC
E31
GND
D32
MA3_L
E32
MA5_L
D33
VCC
E33
GND
D34
MA7_L
E34
MA9_L
D35
VCC
E35
GND
D36
MA11_L
E36
MA12_L
D37
VCC
E37
GND
D38
VCC
E38
VCC
D39
VCC
E39
GND
D40
TCK
E40
VCC
D41
VCC
E41
GND
D42
MD2_L
E42
MD4_L
D43
VCC
E43
GND
D44
MD6_L
E44
MD8_L
D45
VCC
E45
GND
D46
MD10_L
E46
MD12_L
D47
VCC
E47
GND
D48
MD15_L
E48
TMS
D49
VCC
E49
GND
D50
MRESET_L
E50
MD17_L
D51
VCC
E51
GND
D52
MD19_L
E52
MD20_L
D53
VCC
E53
continued
246
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory
Memory Module Connector: D & E (continued)
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
GND
D54
MD23_L
E54
MD25_L
D55
VCC
E55
GND
D56
MD27_L
E56
MD29_L
D57
VCC
E57
GND
D58
MD30_L
E58
MD32_L
D59
VCC
E59
GND
D60
MD35_L
E60
247
20 Power System: Description/Calculating
Power Usage
This chapter describes the modular power system and explains how to calculate power usage for
your server.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
AC Input Power
The server can operate with input voltages of 200-240VAC or 100-120VAC. A jumper located on
the midplane selects the input voltage at which the server will operate. The jumper also
enables/disables the brown out recovery feature that aids server startup during low AC input
voltage conditions.
Valid AC Input
Range
AC Mains
Brown Out Feature
Installed
200-240VAC or
100-120VAC
15A
15A
Disabled
Disabled
Removed
200-240VAC
15A
Enabled
JP1 Position
Enabling the brown out feature ensures that all power supplies will turn on when the AC input
voltage reaches at least 180VAC following an AC main brown out condition.
Disabling the brown out feature can cause power problems when the system tries to recover from a
brown out condition. The problems that can result depend on server AC input voltages.
•
•
•
For 100-120VAC input power after a brown out: AC input voltage may slowly rise to its
nominal level and because of slight differences in power supply turn on thresholds at 90V, one
power supply may turn on before the others. This power supply will most likely see too large
a DC load and shut down (other power supplies may do the same), removing all DC voltages
from the server.
For 200-240VAC input power after a brown out: AC input voltage may slowly rise to its
nominal level and the power supplies turn on at 90V doubling the current load on the AC main
and causing them to trip.
For power supply input voltages see Table 20-3.
249
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Jumper JP1 Installing/Removing
See Figure 20-1.
1. Shut down the server and disconnect it from its power source.
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
3. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:
Removing/Reinstalling.”.
4. Install or remove the jumper.
5. Reinstall the peripheral bay.
6. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:
Removing/Reinstalling.”
7. Reconnect the server to power and start the server.
OM07348
Figure 20-1. Jumper JP1
250
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
Power System
The modular power system for the server is provided by up to three autoranging power supplies
and a midplane. When connected to 100-120VAC mains each power supply is capable of
delivering 650 watts DC. When connected to 200-240VAC mains each power supply is capable of
delivering 750 watts DC. The power system may be configured with two power supplies (standard)
or three power supplies (2 + 1, redundant). The power supplies are mounted in a 2 + 1 pattern in
the back of the chassis along the bottom. Each power supply has an integrated fan for cooling.
The midplane provides connectors for the hot-swap power supplies. The midplane is the DC
power distribution hub providing connectors for the CPU baseboard, memory modules, I/O
baseboard, and peripheral bay. The midplane also provides the interface logic for power supply
related management functions.
Operator accessible areas are mechanically shielded from energy hazards while hot-swapping—
installing or removing—a hard disk drive, or a system fan. PCI hot-plug expansion boards are
240VA protected by current limiting circuitry on the PHP I/O board.
Care must be taken not to overload an AC mains circuit by plugging to many loads into a single
AC circuit. It is recommended to either plugging the power cord of the server in a separate circuit
or calculating the current drawn from loads attached to an AC circuit to make sure AC current
limits will not been exceeded.
If a power supply fails in the redundant power system, an LED marked “FAIL” at the back of the
power supply illuminates yellow. If a power supply predictive failure event occurs in the redundant
power system, an LED marked “PRFL” at the back of the power supply blinks yellow. In both
cases, the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel starts flashing. The supply can be
hot-swapped—removed and replaced—without turning off the power or impacting server
operations. If the load on a single power supply exceeds the output ratings defined in Table 20-2,
an LED marked “FAIL” at the back of the power supply blinks yellow and the entire power system
is shut down.
251
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Power Supply Input Voltages
Table 20-1. Power Supply AC Input Ratings
Parameter
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
Units
V in (115)
90
100-120
132
V RMS
V in (230)
180
200-240
264
V RMS
V in Frequency
47
50/60
63
Hz
AC Input Current (at
maximum load)
13 A @115 VAC
7 A @ 220 VAC
Ampere
Power Supply Output Voltages
Table 20-2. Power Supply Output Ratings
Individual Supply at
220-240VAC
Two or Three1
Supplies at
100-120VAC
Two or Three1
Supplies at
200-240VAC
31 A
36 A
58 A
68 A
5V
31 A
36 A
58 A
64 A
12 V
31 A
36 A
58 A
68 A
-12 V
1A
1A
1A
1A
5 V Standby
1A
1A
1.75 A
1.75 A
15 V
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
Power
Supply
Outputs
Individual Supply at
100-120VAC
3.3 V
1
252
Forced load sharing is for 5, 3.3, and 12 V only. Passive load sharing is used for 5V Standby, -12 and 15V.
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
Server Current Usage
Table 20-3 shows the current usage for both minimally and fully configured servers. You can
easily calculate power usage in the server from the numbers provided. The table is for reference
only. It is not meant to provide the exact current usage in the server.
✏
NOTE
The current usage will vary depending on the number of processors, the
number of I/O card, the number of hard drives, and the size and number of
DIMMs on the memory modules installed in your server.
Table 20-3. Server Board Set Voltages and Currents
+3.3 V
+5 V
+12 V
+5 V Standby
-12 V
Min.1
Max.2
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
Current
4.6 A
4.6 A
800 mA
6.2 A
0.2 A
28.5 A
0A
0A
0A
0A
Front panel8
0A
0A
50mA
2.23A
3.1A
4.0A
100 mA
1.0A
1 mA
10 mA
Total (CPU
4.6 A
4.6 A
850 mA
8.4 A
3.3 A
32.5 A
100 mA
1.0 A
1 mA
10 mA
Total DRAM (8 GB)
2.4 A
27.2 A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
0A
PHP I/O baseboard
600 mA
5A
600 mA
4.25 A
0A
20 mA
5 mA
500 mA
0A
0A
0A
23 A
0A
35.68 A
0A
5.0 A
0A
0A
0A
1.0 A
I/O riser card
0A
0A
0A
70 mA
0A
30 mA
5 mA
150 mA
0A
0A
Total (I/O
600 mA
28 A
600 mA
40 A
0A
5.05 A
10 mA
650 mA
0A
1.0 A
baseboard)
A
Total Current
9.2 A
59.8 A
1.5 A
48.4 A
3.3 S
37.6 A
110 mA
1.7 A
1 mA
1.0 A
304 W
197.3 W
7.5 W
242 W
39.6 W
451.2 W
0.55 W
8.5 W
0.01 W
12 W
CPU baseboard with
processors
baseboard)
PCI/ISA
3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(DRAM, CPU and
I/O baseboards)
Total Power
(DRAM, CPU and
I/O baseboards)
1
Minimum server configuration: one idle processor, two VRMs, three processor termination modules, two memory
modules totaling 128 MB DRAM, no I/O adapter cards, front panel with system fans at low speed, I/O riser card, no
keyboard, no mouse, no video, no parallel-port connections, and no bus activity.
2
Maximum server configuration: four 65 W processors six VRMs operating at 80% efficiency, front panel with system
fans at high speed, I/O riser card, keyboard, mouse, video, parallel port connected, two memory modules with 8 GB
DRAM, and all I/O adapter slots filled. See notes 3-8. Maximized bus activity.
3
Current must not exceed 7.58 A (25 W) per PCI slot or 23 A total for all PCI expansion slots on +3.3 V.
4
Current must not exceed 5 A (25 W) per PCI slot or 35.68 A total for all expansion slots on +5 V.
5
Current must not exceed 2 A per ISA slot or 35.68 A total for all expansion slots on +5 V.
6
Current must not exceed 500 mA per PCI or ISA slot or 5 A total for all expansion slots on +12 V.
7
Current must not exceed 100 mA per slot or 1.0 A total for all expansion slots on -12 V.
8
These values are included for reference only. They are not included in the maximum configuration requirements.
253
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Calculating Power Usage
Use the worksheets in Tables 20-4 and 20-5 to calculate the total DC power used by your server
configuration.
The documentation that comes with each add-in device should specify its current and voltage
requirements.
To calculate the total combined wattage for your server, do this:
1. List the current for each board and device in the appropriate voltage level column in
Table 20-4.
2. Add the currents in each column of Table 20-4, and enter the total current for each column in
Table 20-5.
3. Multiply the voltage by the total current to get the total wattage for each voltage level.
4. Add the total wattage for each voltage level to arrive at a total combined power usage on the
power supply.
Table 20-4. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage
Current (maximum) at voltage levels:
Device
+3.3 V
+ 5V stby
+5 V
+12 V
-12 V
PHP I/O baseboard
5A
0.65 A
4.32 A
0.05 A
0A
6.2 A
28.5 A
16-bit ISA slot, J3B
32-bit primary PCI slot 1, P1
32-bit primary PCI slot 2, P2
32-bit secondary PCI slot 3, P3
32-bit secondary PCI slot 4, P4
32-bit secondary PCI slot 5, P5
32-bit secondary PCI slot 6, P6
64-bit PCI slot 7, P7
64-bit PCI slot 8, P8
64-bit PCI slot 9, P9
64-bit PCI slot 10, P10
CPU baseboard with four 65 W
processors
4.6 A
Primary memory module (16 256MB
DIMMs)
13.6 A
Secondary memory module (16
256MB DIMMs)
13.6 A
3.5-inch diskette drive
0.65 A
CD-ROM drive
0.55 A
0.60 A
1st SCA hard disk drive
2nd SCA hard disk drive
continued
254
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage
Table 20-4. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage (continued)
Current (maximum) at voltage levels:
Device
+3.3 V
+5 V stby
+5 V
Front panel plus six cooling fans
+12 V
-12 V
4.0 A
Total Current
✏
NOTE
The total combined wattage must be less than 935 watts for your server
configuration. The current for each voltage level must be less than the limits
prescribed by the above power supply output voltage specification; see
Table 20-2.
Table 20-5. Total Combined Power Used by Your Server
Voltage Level and Total Current (V x A = W)
Total Watts for Each Voltage Level
(+3.3 V) x (
A)
W
(+5 V) x (
A)
W
(-5 V) x (
A)
W
(+12 V) x (
A)
W
(-12 V) x (
A)
W
(+5 V Standby) x (
A)
W
Total Combined Wattage =
W
255
Blank page
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing
This chapter tells how to replace the lithium back-up battery on the PHP I/O baseboard.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Tools and Supplies You Need
•
•
•
Flat-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)
Pen or pencil
Equipment Log
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.
257
AC450NX Server System Product Guide
Back-up Battery
The lithium battery on the PHP I/O baseboard powers the real-time clock (RTC) for up to ten years
in the absence of power. The RTC contains 256 bytes of general purpose RAM that stores the
system BIOS configuration information, clock registers, and general purpose control registers.
Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved replacement devices and available
service.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
Discard used battery according to manufacturer’s instructions.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning
må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare. Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri
som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukt batteri returneres
apparatleverandøren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller
en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo
ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty
paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
258
Chapter 21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing
Replacing the Back-up Battery
See Figure 21-1.
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”
2. Turn the server off and unplug the AC power cord.
3. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”
4. Using the tip of your finger, press down lightly on the lithium battery, and slide it toward the
tabs on the socket.
5. Gently lift the battery out of the socket, and dispose of it according to local ordinance.
6. Remove the new battery from its package, and, being careful to observe correct polarity
(positive-side up), gently insert it into the battery socket.
7. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.
8. Run the SSU to restore the configuration settings to the RTC. For information about running
this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”
259
AC450NX Server System Product Guide
2
A
B
C
1
3
OM07316
Figure 21-1. Lithium Back-up Battery
A.
B.
C.
White text
260
Tab
Positive-side up
Battery
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error
Messages
This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that might occur while you are using the
server.
For detailed instructions about removing or installing a component or checking jumpers, see the
chapter whose number appears in parentheses after a given checklist item. Also check the
Contents and Index for specific page locations.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Resetting the Server
You can reset the server in several ways.
Manually
Press
To
<Ctrl+Alt+Del>
Clear server memory and reload the operating system. This is a "soft boot" reset.
Reset button
Clear server memory, restart POST, and reload the operating system.
Power off/on
Turn the server power off and then on. This is a "cold boot" reset; it has the same
effect as pushing the reset button except that power is halted to all peripherals.
Programmed
You can reset the server with software.
261
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Initial Startup of the Server
Problems that occur at initial startup are usually caused by incorrect installation or configuration of
the server. Hardware failure is a less frequent cause.
Checklist
❑ Are all cables correctly connected and secured?
❑ Are the processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges fully seated in the slot 2 connectors on the
CPU baseboard? (Chapter 13)
❑ Are front side bus terminator modules installed in all unused slot 2 connectors on the CPU
baseboard? (Chapter 13)
❑ Are the memory modules fully seated in the connectors on the midplane? (Chapter 13)
❑ Are all DIMMs on the memory module installed correctly? (Chapter 19)
❑ Are all add-in ISA and PCI boards fully seated in their slots on the PHP I/O baseboard?
(Chapter 13)
❑ Are all jumper settings on the PHP I/O and CPU baseboards correct? (Chapters 17 and 18)
❑ Are all jumper and switch settings on add-in boards and peripheral devices correct? To check
settings, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. Ensure there are no conflicts—for
example, two add-in boards sharing the same interrupt.
❑ Are all add-in boards installed correctly? (Chapter 13)
❑ If the server has a hard disk drive, is it properly formatted or defined?
❑ Is the disk backplane configured correctly? (Chapter 16)
❑ Are all device drivers properly installed? (Chapter 2)
❑ Are the configuration settings made with the SSU correct? (Chapter 5)
❑ Is the operating system properly loaded? Refer to the operating system documentation.
❑ Did you press the on/off power switch on the front panel to turn the server on (power-on LED
should be lit)?
❑ Is the power cord plugged into the AC inlet filter of the server and into a NEMA 5-15R outlet
for 100-120 V~ or a NEMA 6-15R outlet for 200-240 V~? (Chapter 2)
❑ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?
If these items are correct but the problem recurs, refer to "More Troubleshooting Procedures" on
page 264.
262
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Running New Application Software
Problems that occur when you run new application software are usually related to the new
software. Faulty equipment is much less likely, especially if other software runs correctly.
Checklist
❑ Does the server meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software? Refer to the
software documentation.
❑ Is the software an authorized copy? If not, get one; unauthorized copies often do not work.
❑ If you are running the software from a diskette, is it a good copy?
❑ If you are running the software from a CD, is it scratched or dirty?
❑ If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, is the software correctly installed?
Were all necessary procedures followed and files installed?
❑ Are the correct device drivers installed?
❑ Is the software correctly configured for the server?
❑ Are you using the software correctly?
If the problems persist, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative.
After the Server Has Been Running Correctly
Problems that occur after the server hardware and software have been running correctly often
indicate equipment failure. Many situations that are easy to correct, however, can also cause such
problems.
Checklist
❑ If you are running the software from a diskette, try a new copy of the software.
❑ If you are running the software from a CD, try a different CD to see if the problem occurs on
all CDs.
❑ If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, try running it from a diskette. If the
software runs correctly, there may be a problem with the copy on the hard disk drive. Reinstall
the software on the hard disk drive, and try running it again. Make sure all the necessary files
are installed.
❑ If the problems are intermittent, there may be a loose cable, dirt in the keyboard (if keyboard
input is incorrect), a marginal power supply, or other random component failures.
❑ If you suspect that a transient voltage spike, power outage, or brownout might have occurred,
reload the software and try running it again. (For example, symptoms of voltage spikes
include a flickering video monitor, unexpected server reboots, and the server does not respond
to user commands.)
263
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
✏
NOTE
If you are getting random errors in your data files, they may be getting
corrupted by voltage spikes on your power line. If you are experiencing any
of the above symptoms that might indicate voltage spikes on the power line,
you may want to install a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the
server power cord.
❑ If the problem recurs after you have checked and corrected all the above items, refer to "More
Troubleshooting Procedures" on page 264.
❑ If you receive any error messages, refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for an
explanation and suggestions.
More Troubleshooting Procedures
This section provides a more detailed approach to identifying a problem and locating its source.
Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing
CAUTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Before disconnecting any peripheral cables from the server, turn off the
server and any external peripheral devices. Failure to do so can cause
permanent damage to the server and/or the peripheral devices.
Turn off the server and all external peripheral devices. Disconnect all devices from the server,
except the keyboard and video monitor.
Make sure the server power cord is plugged into a properly grounded AC outlet. (Chapter 2)
Make sure your video monitor and keyboard are correctly connected to the server. Turn on the
monitor. Set its brightness and contrast controls to at least two-thirds of their maximum
ranges (refer to the documentation supplied with your monitor).
If the operating system normally loads from the hard disk drive, make sure there is no diskette
in drive A. If the OS normally loads from a diskette, place the diskette containing the OS files
in drive A.
Turn on the server. If the power LED does not light, refer to "Power Light Does Not Light" on
page 266.
Monitoring POST
See Chapter 3.
264
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights
As POST determines the server configuration, it tests for the presence of each mass storage device
installed in the server. As each device is checked, its activity light should turn on briefly. Check
for the following:
❑ Does the diskette drive activity light turn on briefly? If not, refer to "Diskette Drive Activity
Light Does Not Light" on page 268.
❑ If there is a hard disk drive or a SCSI device installed in the server, does the drive activity light
on the front panel turn on briefly? If not, refer to "Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not
Light" on page 268.
✏
NOTE
For information about the controls and indicators, see Chapter 1.
Confirming Loading of the Operating System
Once the server boots up, the operating system prompt appears on the screen. The prompt varies
according to the operating system. If the operating system prompt does not appear, refer to "Initial
Startup of the Server" on page 262.
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions
This section provides possible solutions for the following specific problems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power light does not light.
Server cooling fans do not rotate or rotate slowly.
No characters appear on screen.
Characters on the screen appear distorted or incorrect.
No beep or incorrect beep pattern emitted.
Activity light on the diskette drive does not light.
Activity light on the hard disk drive does not light.
Activity light on the CD-ROM drive does not light.
Application software problems are unresolved.
Server powers up, and it immediately powers down.
Try the solutions in the order given. If you cannot correct the problem, contact your service
representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
265
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Power Light Does Not Light
Check the following:
❑ Is the server operating normally? If so, the power LED is probably defective.
❑ Are there other problems with the server? If so, check the items listed under "Server Cooling
Fans Do Not Rotate Properly."
❑ Is the yellow power supply failure LED flashing? If so, replace the failing power supply.
If all items are correct and problems persist, contact your service representative or authorized
dealer for assistance.
Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly
If the server cooling fans are not operating properly, server components will be damaged.
✏
NOTE
The server contains six fans that provide cooling for the components. The
integrated fan on each power supply provides more cooling for the SCSI
hard disk drives in the hot-docking bays. In case of cooling problems, you
cannot access or replace the fans integrated in the power supplies. There are
no serviceable components in the power supply. If the power supply is
opened, the warranty is voided.
Check the following:
❑ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?
❑ Is the server power cord properly connected to AC inlet filter and the wall outlet?
❑ Did you press the power on/off push-button switch?
❑ Is the power-on light lit?
❑ Have any of the fan motors stopped (use the server management subsystem to check the fan
status)?
If switches and connections are correct and AC power is available at the wall outlet, contact your
service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
266
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
No Characters Appear on Screen
Check the following:
❑ Is the keyboard working?
❑ Is the video monitor plugged in and turned on?
❑ Are the brightness and contrast controls on the video monitor properly adjusted?
❑ Are the switch settings on the video monitor correct?
❑ Is the video monitor signal cable properly installed?
If you are using an add-in video controller board, do the following:
1. Verify that the video controller board is fully seated in the PHP I/O baseboard connector.
2. Run the SSU to specify that an add-in VGA/EGA controller board is installed.
3. Reboot the server for changes to take effect.
4. If there are still no characters on the screen after you reboot the server and POST emits a beep
code, write down the beep code you hear. This information is useful for your service
representative. See "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269.
5. If you do not receive a beep code and characters do not appear, the video monitor or video
controller may have failed. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for
assistance.
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect
Check the following:
❑ Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted on the video monitor? Refer to the
manufacturer’s documentation.
❑ Are the video monitor signal and power cables properly installed?
If the problem persists, the monitor may be faulty or it may be the incorrect type. Contact your
service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
Incorrect or no Beep Codes
If the server operates normally but there was no beep, the speaker may be defective. Run the SSU
to verify that the speaker is enabled (Chapter 5). If the speaker is enabled but not functioning,
contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
Record the beep code emitted by POST, and refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for
information about beep codes and error messages.
267
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light
Check the following:
❑ Are the power and signal cables to the diskette drive properly installed?
❑ Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the diskette drive set correctly?
❑ Is the diskette drive properly configured?
❑ Is the diskette drive activity light always on? If so, the signal cable may be plugged in
incorrectly.
If you are using the onboard diskette controller, use the SSU to make sure that controller is
enabled. If you are using an add-in diskette controller, make sure that the onboard controller is
disabled. (Chapter 5)
If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the diskette drive, PHP I/O baseboard, or
drive signal cable. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light
If you have installed one or more hard disk drives in your server, check the following:
❑ Are the power and signal cables to the IDE hard disk drive properly installed?
❑ Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the hard disk drive and controller board set correctly?
❑ Is the onboard IDE controller enabled?
✏
NOTE
The hard disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an
IDE hard disk drive or SCSI device is in use.
❑ Is the hard disk drive properly configured?
❑ Are the SCSI signal cables properly connected to the peripheral bay backplane?
If you received error messages, refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for information
about error messages.
If you did not receive error messages, run the SSU and make sure the hard disk drive is configured
with the correct parameters. (Chapter 5)
If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the hard disk drive, PHP I/O baseboard, drive
signal cable, or LED connector. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for
assistance.
268
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Problems With Application Software
If you have problems with application software, do the following:
1. Verify that the software is properly configured for the server. Refer to the software installation
and operation documentation to set up and use the software.
2. Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using.
3. Make sure all cables are installed correctly.
4. Verify that the baseboard jumpers are set correctly.
5. If other software runs correctly on the server, contact your vendor about the failing software.
If the problem persists, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative for
assistance.
Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down
If the server powers up after a DC power failure and then immediately powers down, check the
power supply failure LED. If it is lit, wait until it goes out before turning the server back on. If
the LED does not go out, you may have to unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlets. When
the LED goes out, plug the power cords back into the outlets.
If the problem persists, the power distribution backplane may be defective. Contact your service
representative or authorized dealer for assistance.
Error Codes and Messages
The server BIOS displays POST error codes and messages on the video monitor. When you turn
on the server, POST displays messages that provide information about the server. If a failure
occurs, POST emits beep codes that indicate errors in hardware, software, or firmware. Before the
video adapter is initialized, audible beep codes inform you of errors. The errors are logged in the
event log and the Extended BIOS Data Area (EBDA). If POST can display a message on the
monitor, it causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears.
269
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Port 80h Codes
After the video adapter has been successfully initialized after the server is turned on, the BIOS
indicates the current testing phase during POST by writing a 2-digit hex code to I/O location 80h.
If a port-80h card is installed, it displays this 2-digit code on a pair of hex display LEDs.
The following table contains the port-80h codes displayed during the boot process. The table also
describes the error conditions associated with each beep code and the corresponding POST
checkpoint (CP) code as seen by a port-80h card. A beep code is a series of individual beeps
emitted by the server speaker, each equal in length. For example, if an error occurs at checkpoint
20h, a beep code of 1-3-1-1 is generated (1 = a single beep, 3 = burst of three beeps).
CP
Beeps
Reason
02
Verify real mode
04
Get processor type
06
Initialize system hardware
08
Initialize chip set registers with initial POST values
09
Set in-POST flag
0A
Initialize processor registers
0B
Enable processor cache
0C
Initialize caches to initial POST values
0E
Initialize I/O
0F
Initialize the local bus IDE
10
Initialize Power Management
11
Load alternate registers with initial new POST values
12
Restore processor control word during warm boot
14
Initialize keyboard controller
16
1-2-2-3
18
BIOS ROM checksum
Initialize 8254 timer
1A
Initialize 8237 DMA controller
1C
Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller
20
1-3-1-1
22
1-3-1-3
24
28
Test DRAM refresh
Test 8742 Keyboard Controller
Set ES segment register to 4 GB
1-3-3-1
2A
Autosize DRAM
Clear 512K base RAM
2C
1-3-4-1
RAM failure on address line xxxx*
2E
1-3-4-3
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of low byte of memory bus
30
1-4-1-1
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of high byte of memory bus
32
Test processor bus-clock frequency
34
Test CMOS
35
RAM initialize alternate chip set registers
36
Warm start shutdown
continued
270
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Port 80h Codes (continued)
CP
Beeps
Reason
37
Reinitialize the chip set (MB only)
38
Shadow system BIOS ROM
39
Reinitialize the cache (MB only)
3A
Autosize cache
3C
Configure advanced chip set registers
3D
Load alternate registers with new CMOS values
40
Set initial new processor speed
42
Initialize interrupt vectors
44
Initialize BIOS interrupts
46
2-1-2-3
Check ROM copyright notice
47
Initialize manager for PCI Option ROMs
48
Check video configuration against CMOS
49
Initialize PCI bus and devices
4A
Initialize all video adapters in system
4B
Display QuietBoot screen
4C
Shadow video BIOS ROM
4E
Display copyright notice
50
Display processor type and speed
52
Test keyboard
54
Set key click if enabled
56
Enable keyboard
58
2-2-3-1
Test for unexpected interrupts
5A
Display prompt "Press F2 to enter SETUP"
5C
Test RAM between 512 and 640k
60
Test extended memory
62
Test extended memory address lines
64
Jump to UserPatch1
66
Configure advanced cache registers
68
Enable external and processor caches
6A
Display external cache size
6C
Display shadow message
6E
Display nondisposable segments
70
Display error messages
72
Check for configuration errors
74
Test real-time clock
76
Check for keyboard errors
7A
Test for key lock on
7C
Set up hardware interrupt vectors
7E
Test coprocessor if present
continued
271
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Port 80h Codes (continued)
CP
Beeps
Reason
80
Detect and install external RS232 ports
82
Detect and install external parallel ports
85
Initialize PC-compatible PnP ISA devices
86
Reinitialize onboard I/O ports
88
Initialize BIOS Data Area
8A
Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area
8C
Initialize floppy controller
90
Initialize hard disk controller
91
Initialize local bus hard disk controller
92
Jump to UserPatch2
93
Build MPTABLE for multiprocessor boards
94
Disable A20 address line
95
Install CD ROM for boot
96
98
Clear huge ES segment register
1-2
Search for option ROMs; one long beep and two short beeps on
checksum failure
9A
Shadow option ROMs
9C
Set up Power Management
9E
Enable hardware interrupts
A0
Set time of day
A2
Check key lock
A4
Initialize typematic rate
A8
Erase F2 prompt
AA
Scan for F2 key stroke
AC
Enter SETUP
AE
Clear in-POST flag
B0
Check for errors
B2
POST done—prepare to boot operating system
B4
1
One short beep before boot
B5
Display MultiBoot menu
B6
Check password (optional)
B8
Clear global descriptor table
BC
Clear parity checkers
BE
Clear screen (optional)
BF
Check virus and backup reminders
C0
Try to boot with INT 19
D0
Interrupt handler error
D2
Unknown interrupt error
D4
Pending interrupt error
continued
272
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
Port 80h Codes (continued)
CP
Beeps
Reason
D6
Initialize option ROM error
D8
Shutdown error
DA
Extended Block Move
DC
Shutdown 10 error
FB
FRB in progress
FC
Five second wait for BMC to initialize
FD
FRB 2 watchdog timer failed, reset will occur in five seconds
POST Error Codes and Messages
The table below contains POST error codes and their associated messages.
Code
Error message
0002
Primary boot device not found
0010
Cache memory failure, do not enable cache
0015
Primary output device not found
0016
Primary input device not found
0042
ISA Config contains invalid info
0050
PnP memory conflict
0051
PnP 32-bit memory conflict
0052
PnP IRQ conflict
0053
PnP DMA conflict
0054
PnP error log is full
0055
Bad PnP serial id checksum
0056
Bad PnP resource data checksum
0060
Keyboard is locked ... Please unlock it
0070
CMOS time & date not set
0080
Option ROM has bad checksum
0083
Shadow of PCI ROM failed
0085
Shadow of ISA ROM failed
0131
Floppy drive A:
0132
Floppy drive B:
0135
Floppy disk controller failure
0140
Shadow of System BIOS Failed
0170
Disabled CPU slot #
0171
CPU Failure—CPU # 1
0172
CPU Failure—CPU # 2
0173
CPU Failure—CPU # 3
0174
CPU Failure—CPU # 4
0175
CPU modules are incompatible or one is not present.
continued
273
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Code
Error message
0176
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 1
0177
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 2
0178
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 3
0179
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 4
0180
Attempting to boot with failed CPU
0181
BSP switched, system may be in uniprocessor mode
0191
CMOS battery failed
0195
CMOS system options not set
0198
CMOS checksum invalid
0289
System memory size mismatch
0295
Address line short detected
0297
Memory size decreased
0299
ECC Error Correction failure
0370
Keyboard controller error
0373
Keyboard stuck key detected
0375
Keyboard and mouse swapped
0430
Timer Channel 2 failure
0440
Gate-A20 failure
0441
Unexpected interrupt in protected mode
0445
Master interrupt controller error
0446
Slave interrupt controller error
0450
Master DMA controller error
0451
Slave DMA controller error
0452
DMA controller error
0460
Fail-safe timer NMI failure
0461
Software port NMI failure
0465
Bus time-out NMI in slot
0467
Expansion board NMI in slot
0510
PCI parity error
0710
Baseboard device resource conflict
0711
Static device resource conflict
0780
PCI Segment 1 memory request exceeds 998 MB
0781
PCI Segment 1 I/O requests exceeds 12K
0782
PCI I/O request exceeds amount available
0783
PCI memory request exceeds amount available
0784
Illegal bus for memory request below 1 MB
0785
Memory request below 1 MB exceeds 1 MB
0800
PCI I/O port conflict
0801
PCI memory conflict
continued
274
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Code
Error message
0802
PCI IRQ conflict
0804
PCI ROM not found, may be OK for this card
0805
Insufficient memory to shadow PCI ROM
0806
Memory allocation failure for second PCI segment
0810
Floppy disk controller resource conflict
0811
Primary IDE controller resource conflict
0812
Secondary IDE controller resource conflict
0815
Parallel port resource conflict
0816
Serial port 1 resource conflict
0817
Serial port 2 resource conflict
0820
Expansion board disabled in slot
0900
NVRAM checksum error, NVRAM cleared
0903
NVRAM data invalid, NVRAM cleared
0982
I/O expansion board NMI in slot
0984
Expansion board disabled in slot
0985
Fail-safe timer NMI
0986
System reset caused by watchdog timer
0987
Bus time-out NMI in slot
8100
Processor 0 failed BIST
8101
Processor 1 failed BIST
8102
Processor 2 failed BIST
8103
Processor 3 failed BIST
8104
Processor 0 internal error (IERR)
8105
Processor 1 internal error (IERR)
8106
Processor 0 thermal trip error
8107
Processor 1 thermal trip error
8108
Watchdog timer failed on last boot
810B
Processor 0 failed initialization
810C
Processor 0 disabled
810D
Processor 1 disabled
810E
Processor 0 failed FRB-3 timer
810F
Processor 1 failed FRB-3 timer
8110
Server management interface failed to function
8128
Processor 2 internal error (IERR)
8129
Processor 3 internal error (IERR)
8130
Processor 2 thermal trip error
8131
Processor 3 thermal trip error
8138
Processor 2 failed FRB-3 timer
8139
Processor 3 failed FRB-3 timer
continued
275
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)
Code
Error message
8140
Processor 2 disabled
8141
Processor 3 disabled
8148
Processor 1 failed initialization
8149
Processor 2 failed initialization
814A
Processor 3 failed initialization
8150
NVRAM cleared by jumper
8152
ESCD data cleared
8153
Password cleared by jumper
8160
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 1
8161
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 2
8162
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 3
8163
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 4
8168
Processor 1 L2 cache failed
8169
Processor 2 L2 cache failed
816A
Processor 3 L2 cache failed
816B
Processor 4 L2 cache failed
8170
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 1
8171
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 2
8172
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 3
8173
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 4
8180
PXB1 failed to respond
8181
Mismatch among processors detected
8182
L2 cache size mismatch
8200
Baseboard management controller failed to function
8201
Front panel controller failed to function
8203
Primary hot-swap controller failed to function
8204
Secondary hot-swap controller failed to function
White text
276
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages
This chapter describes the front panel.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Front Panel Board
The front panel board provides the user interface to the server. Three push-button switches control
server power, reset, and NMI assertion. Four LEDs indicate power on, power supply failure, hard
drive failure, and fan or other server cooling failure. The LCD panel provides information about
the server such as boot status, available number of processors, and other server management
information.
The front panel board also allows other servers to communicate with this server—even while
power is down—via an external Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB). The ICMB is an
extension of the internal ICMB. A Phillips 80C652 microcontroller on the board controls all front
panel functions while AC power is available.
The board connects to the rest of the server through a connector on the CPU baseboard. All six
system fans plug into hot-plug connectors on the front panel board. The microcontroller controls
fan speed, monitors fan tachometer outputs, and indicates via LEDs—one for each fan—when fan
failures occur. The converter circuit converts 8.4 VDC to 12 VDC and provides over current
protection.
277
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Fan Speed Control Voltage
The server fans operate at two speeds: slow and fast. The low voltage setting allows the fans to
run at a slower speed to minimize acoustic noise under normal conditions. When the Front Panel
Controller (FPC) senses a fan failure or the ambient air temperature sensor reads 30 °C or higher, it
sets the fan voltage to high to increase the fan speed. The ambient air temperature must drop to
28 °C or the failing condition must be cleared before the FPC returns the fans to slow speed again.
When the ambient air temperature reads between 28 °C and 30 °C, the fans remain at their current
speed.
Table 23-1. Fan Speed Control
Fan Failure
Ambient Air Temperature
Fan Speed
Voltage
No
<28°C
Slow
Low
Yes
<28°C
Fast
High
No
>30°C
Fast
High
Yes
>30°C
Fast
High
Speaker
Either the FPC or the PHP I/O baseboard can control the speaker on the front panel board.
I2C Bus
The private I2C bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server. The 5 V standby
voltage provides power for the bus, and it is available even when server power is off.
White text
278
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
This chapter describes the peripheral bay blindmate board.
Warnings and Cautions
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on
page 115.
Features
The peripheral bay blindmate board provides power and signal interconnection from the midplane
and PHP I/O baseboard to the system peripheral devices (diskette drive and CD ROM drive) and
the disk backplane.
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors
A
B
C
D
E
F
OM07329
Figure 24-1. Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors
A. Bindmate connector (J1)
B. Power connector (J2)
C. Wide SCSI connector (J5)
D. Reserved (J6)
E. IDE connector (J4)
F. Diskette connector (J3)
279
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Blind Mate Connector J1
Signals
Pins
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
280
A
RESET(1)
DD7 (3)
DD6 (5)
DD5 (7)
DD4 (9)
DD3 (11)
DD2 (13)
DD1 (15)
DD0 (17)
GND
DMARQ (21)
GND
IORDY (27)
DMACK (29)
GND
INTRQ (31)
DA1 (33)
DASP (39)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
B
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+12v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
+5v
C
DD8 (4)
DD9 (6)
DD10 (8)
DD11 (10)
DD12 (12)
DD13 (14)
DD14 (16)
DD15 (18)
GND
DIOW (23)
CSEL (28)
DIOR (25)
GND
RESERVED (32)
PDIAG (34)
DA2 (36)
CS0 (37)
DA0 (35)
CS1 (38)
GND
GND
S68 (-DB 11)
S34 (+DB 11)
S65 (-DB8)
S31 (+DB 8)
S62 (-C/D)
S28 (+C/D)
S59 (-RST)
S25 (+RST)
S56
S22
S53 (RESERVED)
S19 (RESERVED)
S50
S16 (DIFFSENS)
S47 (-DB 7)
S13 (+DB 7)
S44 (-DB 4)
S10 (+DB 4)
S41 (-DB 1)
S7 (+DB 1)
S38 (-DB 15)
S4 (+DB 15)
S35 (-DB 12)
S1 (+DB 12)
GND
GND
GND
D
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
S32 (+DB 9)
S66 (-DB 9)
S29 (+REQ)
S63 (-REQ)
S26 (+MSG)
S60 (-MSG)
S23 (+BSY)
S57 (-BSY)
S20
S54
S17 (TERMPWR)
S51 (TERMPWR)
S14 (+DB P)
S48 (-DB P)
S11 (+DB5)
S45 (-DB 5)
S8 (+DB 2)
S42 (-DB 2)
S5 (+DB P1)
S39 (-DB P1)
S2 (+DB 13)
S36 (-DB 13)
GND
SDA
PWR_GOOD
E
FD_DSKCHG_L
FD_HDSEL_L
FD_RDATA_L
FD_WPROT_L
FD_MSEN0
FD_TRK0_L
FD_WGATE_L
FD_WDATA_L
FD_STEP_L
FD_DIR_L
FD_MSEN1
FD_MTR1_L
FD_DR0_L
FD_DR1_L
FD_MTR0_L
FD_INDEX_L
FD_DRATE0
KEY
N/C
FD_DENSEL
OEM 1
OEM 2
OEM 3
S67 (-DB 10)
S33 (+DB 10)
S64 (-I/O)
S30 (+I/O)
S61 (-SEL)
S27 (+SEL)
S58 (-ACK)
S24 (+ACK)
S55 (-ATN)
S21 (+ATN)
S52 (TERMPWR)
S18 (TERMPWR)
S49
S15
S46 (-DB 6)
S12 (+DB 6)
S43 (-DB 3)
S9 (+DB 3)
S40 (-DB 0)
S6 (+DB 0)
S37 (-DB 14)
S3 (+DB 14)
GND
Reserved
SCL
Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
Power Connector J2
Pin
Signal
Pin Signal
1
+12v
11
+12v
2
GND
12
GND
3
+12v
13
+12v
4
+5v
14
+5v
5
GND
15
GND
6
+5v
16
+5v
7
GND
17
GND
8
SCL
18
SDA
9
GND
19
GND
10
PWR_GOOD
20
Reserved
Diskette Connector J3
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GND
2
FD_DENSEL
3
GND
4
N/C
5
KEY
6
FD_DRATE0
7
GND
8
FD_INDEX_L
9
GND
10
FD_MTR0_L
11
GND
12
FD_DR1_L
13
GND
14
FD_DR0_L
15
GND
16
FD_MTR1_L
17
FD_MSEN1
18
FD_DIR_L
19
GND
20
FD_STEP_L
21
GND
22
FD_WDATA_L
23
GND
24
FD_WGATE_L
25
GND
26
FD_TRK0_L
27
FD_MSEN0
28
FD_WPROT_L
29
GND
30
FD_RDATA_L
31
GND
32
FD_HDSEL_L
33
GND
34
FD_DSKCHG_L
281
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
IDE Connector J4
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
RESET
2
GND
3
DD7
4
DD8
5
DD6
6
DD9
7
DD5
8
DD10
9
DD4
10
DD11
11
DD3
12
DD12
13
DD2
14
DD13
15
DD1
16
DD14
17
DD0
18
DD15
19
GND
20
KEYPIN (NC)
21
DMARQ
22
GND
23
DIOW
24
GND
25
DIOR
26
GND
27
IORDY
28
CSEL
29
DMACK
30
GND
31
INTRQ
32
RESERVED
33
DA1
34
PDIAG
35
DA0
36
DA2
37
CS0
38
CS1
39
DASP
40
GND
282
Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description
Wide SCSI Connector J5
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
S1 (+DB 12)
35
S35 (-DB 12)
2
S2 (+DB 13)
36
S36 (-DB 13)
3
S3 (+DB 14)
37
S37 (-DB 14)
4
S4 (+DB 15)
38
S38 (-DB 15)
5
S5 (+DB P1)
39
S39 (-DB P1)
6
S6 (+DB 0)
40
S40 (-DB 0)
7
S7 (+DB 1)
41
S41 (-DB 1)
8
S8 (+DB 2)
42
S42 (-DB 2)
9
S9 (DB 3)
43
S43 (-DB 3)
10
S10 (+DB 4)
44
S44 (-DB 4)
11
S11 (+DB5)
45
S45 (-DB 5)
12
S12 (+DB 6)
46
S46 (-DB 6)
13
S13 (+DB 7)
47
S47 (-DB 7)
14
S14 (+DB P)
48
S48 (-DB P)
15
S15
49
S49
16
S16 (DIFFSENS)
50
S50
17
S17 (TERMPWR)
51
S51 (TERMPWR)
18
S18 (TERMPWR)
52
S52 (TERMPWR)
19
S19 (RESERVED)
53
S53 (RESERVED)
20
S20
54
S54
21
S21 (+ATN)
55
S55 (-ATN)
22
S22
56
S56
23
S23 (+BSY)
57
S57 (-BSY)
24
S24 (+ACK)
58
S58 (-ACK)
25
S25 (+RST)
59
S59 (-RST)
26
S26 (+MSG)
60
S60 (-MSG)
27
S27 (+SEL)
61
S61 (-SEL)
28
S28 (+C/D)
62
S62 (-C/D)
29
S29 (+REQ)
63
S63 (-REQ)
30
S30 (+I/O)
64
S64 (-I/O)
31
S31 (+DB 8)
65
S65 (-DB8)
32
S32 (+DB 9)
66
S66 (-DB 9)
33
S33 (DB +10)
67
S67 (-DB 10)
34
S34 (DB +11)
68
S68 (-DB 11)
283
A Regulatory Specifications
The AC450NX server meets specifications and regulations for safety and EMC.
Declaration of Compliance
The CE marking on this product indicates that it is in compliance with the European community’s
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73123/EEC)
Safety Compliance
USA/Canada:
Europe:
International:
UL 1950-CSA 950-95
TUV to EN60950 (A1+A2+A3+A4)
EU Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) (CE Mark)
CB Certificate to IEC950 plus EMKO-TSE(74-SEC) 207/94
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
USA:
FCC 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15, Class A
Canada:
ICES-003 Class A
Europe:
EN55022, Class A
EN50082-1
EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
EN61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity
IEN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient
EN 61000-3-2; -3, Harmonic Currents
EU EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (CE Mark)
International:
Australia/New Zealand:
Japan:
CISPR 22, Class A
AS/NZS 3548, Class A Limits (using CISPR 22 Class A Limits)
VCCI Class A ITE (using CISPR 22 Class A Limit)
285
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice (USA)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
✏
NOTE
If a Class A device is installed within this system, then the system is to be
considered a Class A system. In this configuration, operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices (International)
English translation of the notice above:
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference
by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic
environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to
take corrective actions.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils
numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils
Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadian des Communications.
English translation of the notice above:
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,”
ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications.
White text
286
B Equipment Log
Use this equipment log to record pertinent information about your server. You will need some of
this information when you run the System Setup Utility (SSU).
Record the model and serial numbers of the server components, dates of component removal or
replacement, and the vendor’s name. Be sure to record the same information for any components
added to the server, such as hard disk drives, add-in boards, or printers.
The location of serial numbers on add-in boards, hard disk drives, and external equipment, such as
video monitors or printers, varies from one manufacturer to another.
Equipment Log
Component
Manufacturer and Model Number
Serial Number
Date Installed
Server
PHP I/O Baseboard
I/O Riser Card
CPU Baseboard
Front Panel Board
Processor 1
Processor 2
Processor 3
Processor 4
VRM 1
VRM 2
VRM 3
VRM 4
VRM 5
VRM 6
Memory Module 1
Memory Module 2
Midplane
Peripheral Bay Backplane
Hot-swappable Power Supply
Hot-swappable Power Supply
Hot-swappable Power Supply
Video Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
continued
287
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Equipment Log (continued)
Component
Diskette Drive
Tape Drive
IDE CD-ROM Drive
SCSI CD-ROM Drive
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 1
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 2
VGA/EGA Adapter Board
SCSI Host Adapter Board
PCI RAID Controller Board
Hot-swappable Fan 1
Hot-swappable Fan 2
Hot-swappable Fan 3
Hot-swappable Fan 4
Hot-swappable Fan 5
Hot-swappable Fan 6
White text
288
Manufacturer and Model Number
Serial Number
Date Installed
C Warnings
WARNING: English (US)
AVERTISSEMENT: Français
WARNUNG: Deutsch
AVVERTENZA: Italiano
ADVERTENCIAS: Español
289
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
WARNING: English (US)
The power supply in this product contains no user-serviceable parts. There may be more
than one supply in this product. Refer servicing only to qualified personnel.
Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type
required.
The DC push-button on/off switch on the system does not turn off system AC power. To
remove AC power from the system, you must unplug each AC power cord from the wall
outlet or power supply.
SAFETY STEPS: Whenever you remove the chassis covers to access the inside of the
system, follow these steps:
1.
Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system.
2.
Turn off the system by using the push-button on/off power switch on the system.
3.
Unplug all AC power cords from the system or from wall outlets.
4.
Label and disconnect all cables connected to I/O connectors or ports on the back of the
system.
5.
Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist
strap attached to chassis ground of the system—any unpainted metal surface—when
handling components.
6.
Do not operate the system with the chassis covers removed.
After you have completed the six SAFETY steps above, you can remove the system covers.
To do this:
1.
Remove and save all screws from the covers.
2.
Remove the covers.
For proper cooling and airflow, always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the
system. Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts. To
install the covers:
1.
Check first to make sure you have not left loose tools or parts inside the system.
2.
Check that cables, add-in boards, and other components are properly installed.
3.
Attach the covers to the chassis with the screws removed earlier, and tighten them
firmly.
4.
Connect all external cables and the AC power cord(s) to the system.
continued
290
Appendix C Warnings
WARNING: English (continued)
A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running. Also, there may
be sharp pins and edges on some board and chassis parts. Contact should be made with
care. Consider wearing protective gloves.
Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The system is designed to operate in a typical office environment. Choose a site that is:
•
Clean and free of airborne particles (other than normal room dust).
•
Well ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight.
•
Away from sources of vibration or physical shock.
•
Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices.
•
In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms, we recommend you plug your
system into a surge suppresser and disconnect telecommunication lines to your modem
during an electrical storm.
•
Provided with a properly grounded wall outlet.
•
Provided with sufficient space to access the power supply cords, because they serve as
the product’s main power disconnect.
291
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
AVERTISSEMENT: Français
Le bloc d'alimentation de ce produit ne contient aucune pièce pouvant être réparée par
l'utilisateur. Ce produit peut contenir plus d'un bloc d'alimentation. Veuillez contacter un
technicien qualifié en cas de problème.
Ne pas essayer d'utiliser ni modifier le câble d'alimentation CA fourni, s'il ne correspond pas
exactement au type requis.
Notez que le commutateur CC de mise sous tension /hors tension du panneau avant n'éteint
pas l'alimentation CA du système. Pour mettre le système hors tension, vous devez
débrancher chaque câble d'alimentation de sa prise.
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ - Lorsque vous ouvrez le boîtier pour accéder à l’intérieur du
système, suivez les consignes suivantes :
1.
Mettez hors tension tous les périphériques connectés au système.
2.
Mettez le système hors tension en mettant l’interrupteur général en position OFF
(bouton-poussoir).
3.
Débranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c.a. du système et des prises murales.
4.
Identifiez et débranchez tous les câbles reliés aux connecteurs d’E-S ou aux accès
derrière le système.
5.
Pour prévenir les décharges électrostatiques lorsque vous touchez aux composants,
portez une bande antistatique pour poignet et reliez-la à la masse du système (toute
surface métallique non peinte du boîtier).
6.
Ne faites pas fonctionner le système tandis que le boîtier est ouvert.
Une fois TOUTES les étapes précédentes accomplies, vous pouvez retirer les panneaux du
système. Procédez comme suit :
1.
Retirez toutes les vis des panneaux et mettez-les dans un endroit sûr.
2.
Retirez les panneaux.
Afin de permettre le refroidissement et l’aération du système, réinstallez toujours les
panneaux du boîtier avant de mettre le système sous tension. Le fonctionnement du
système en l’absence des panneaux risque d’endommager ses pièces. Pour installer les
panneaux, procédez comme suit :
1.
Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir oublié d’outils ou de pièces démontées dans le système.
2.
Assurez-vous que les câbles, les cartes d’extension et les autres composants sont bien
installés.
3.
Revissez solidement les panneaux du boîtier avec les vis retirées plus tôt.
4.
Rebranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c. a. et câbles externes au système.
suite
292
Appendix C Warnings
AVERTISSEMENT: Français (suite)
Le microprocesseur et le dissipateur de chaleur peuvent être chauds si le système a été
sous tension. Faites également attention aux broches aiguës des cartes et aux bords
tranchants du capot. Nous vous recommandons l'usage de gants de protection.
Danger d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas remontée correctement. Remplacer uniquement
avec une batterie du même type ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant.
Disposez des piles usées selon les instructions du fabricant.
Le système a été conçu pour fonctionner dans un cadre de travail normal. L'emplacement
choisi doit être :
•
Propre et dépourvu de poussière en suspension (sauf la poussière normale).
•
Bien aéré et loin des sources de chaleur, y compris du soleil direct.
•
A l'abri des chocs et des sources de vibrations.
•
Isolé de forts champs électromagnétiques géenérés par des appareils électriques.
•
Dans les régions sujettes aux orages magnétiques il est recomandé de brancher votre
système à un supresseur de surtension, et de débrancher toutes les lignes de
télécommunications de votre modem durant un orage.
•
Muni d'une prise murale correctement mise à la terre.
•
Suffisamment spacieux pour vous permettre d'accéder aux câbles d'alimentation (ceuxci étant le seul moyen de mettre le système hors tension).
293
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
WARNUNG: Deutsch
Benutzer können am Netzgerät dieses Produkts keine Reparaturen vornehmen. Das
Produkt enthält möglicherweise mehrere Netzgeräte. Wartungsarbeiten müssen von
qualifizierten Technikern ausgeführt werden.
Versuchen Sie nicht, das mitgelieferte Netzkabel zu ändern oder zu verwenden, wenn es
sich nicht genau um den erforderlichen Typ handelt.
Der Wechselstrom des Systems wird durch den Ein-/Aus-Schalter für Gleichstrom nicht
ausgeschaltet. Ziehen Sie jedes Wechselstrom-Netzkabel aus der Steckdose bzw. dem
Netzgerät, um den Stromanschluß des Systems zu unterbrechen.
SICHERHEISMASSNAHMEN: Immer wenn Sie die Gehäuseabdeckung abnehmen um an
das Systeminnere zu gelangen, sollten Sie folgende Schritte beachten:
1.
Schalten Sie alle an Ihr System angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus.
2.
Schalten Sie das System mit dem Hauptschalter aus.
3.
Ziehen Sie den Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems aus der Steckdose.
4.
Auf der Rückseite des Systems beschriften und ziehen Sie alle Anschlußkabel von den
I/O Anschlüssen oder Ports ab.
5.
Tragen Sie ein geerdetes Antistatik Gelenkband, um elektrostatische Ladungen (ESD)
über blanke Metallstellen bei der Handhabung der Komponenten zu vermeiden.
6.
Schalten Sie das System niemals ohne ordnungsgemäß montiertes Gehäuse ein.
Nachdem Sie die oben erwähnten ersten sechs SICHERHEITSSCHRITTE durchgeführt
haben, können Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen, indem Sie:
1.
Entfernen Sie alle Schrauben der Gehäuseabdeckung.
2.
Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab.
Zur ordnungsgemäßen Kühlung und Lüftung muß die Gehäuseabdeckung immer wieder vor
dem Einschalten installiert werden. Ein Betrieb des Systems ohne angebrachte Abdeckung
kann Ihrem System oder Teile darin beschädigen. Um die Abdeckung wieder anzubringen:
1.
Vergewissern Sie sich, daß Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Teile im Innern des Systems
zurückgelassen haben.
2.
Überprüfen Sie alle Kabel, Zusatzkarten und andere Komponenten auf
ordnungsgemäßen Sitz und Installation.
3.
Bringen Sie die Abdeckungen wieder am Gehäuse an, indem Sie die zuvor gelösten
Schrauben wieder anbringen. Ziehen Sie diese gut an.
4.
Schließen Sie alle externen Kabel und den AC Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems
wieder an.
Fortsetzung
294
Appendix C Warnings
WARNUNG: Deutsch (Fortsetzung)
Der Mikroprozessor und der Kühler sind möglicherweise erhitzt, wenn das System in Betrieb
ist. Außerdem können einige Platinen und Gehäuseteile scharfe Spitzen und Kanten
aufweisen. Arbeiten an Platinen und Gehäuse sollten vorsichtig ausgeführt werden. Sie
sollten Schutzhandschuhe tragen.
Bei falschem Einsetzen einer neuen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Die Batterie darf
nur durch denselben oder einen entsprechenden, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp
ersetzt werden. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien den Anweisungen des Herstellers
entsprechend.
Das System wurde für den Betrieb in einer normalen Büroumgebung entwickelt. Der
Standort sollte:
•
sauber und staubfrei sein (Hausstaub ausgenommen);
•
gut gelüftet und keinen Heizquellen ausgesetzt sein (einschließlich direkter
Sonneneinstrahlung);
•
keinen Erschütterungen ausgesetzt sein;
•
keine starken, von elektrischen Geräten erzeugten elektromagnetischen Felder
aufweisen;
•
in Regionen, in denen elektrische Stürme auftreten, mit einem
Überspannungsschutzgerät verbunden sein; während eines elektrischen Sturms sollte
keine Verbindung der Telekommunikationsleitungen mit dem Modem bestehen;
•
mit einer geerdeten Wechselstromsteckdose ausgerüstet sein;
•
über ausreichend Platz verfügen, um Zugang zu den Netzkabeln zu gewährleisten, da
der Stromanschluß des Produkts hauptsächlich über die Kabel unterbrochen wird.
295
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
AVVERTENZA: Italiano
Rivolgersi ad un tecnico specializzato per la riparazione dei componenti dell’alimentazione di
questo prodotto. È possibile che il prodotto disponga di più fonti di alimentazione.
Non modificare o utilizzare il cavo di alimentazione in c.a. fornito dal produttore, se non
corrisponde esattamente al tipo richiesto.
L’interruttore attivato/disattivato nel pannello anteriore non interrompe l’alimentazione in c.a.
del sistema. Per interromperla, è necessario scollegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione in c.a.
dalle prese a muro o dall’alimentazione di corrente.
PASSI DI SICUREZZA: Qualora si rimuovano le coperture del telaio per accedere
all’interno del sistema, seguire i seguenti passi:
1.
Spegnere tutti i dispositivi periferici collegati al sistema.
2.
Spegnere il sistema, usando il pulsante spento/acceso dell’interruttore del sistema.
3.
Togliere tutte le spine dei cavi del sistema dalle prese elettriche.
4.
Identificare e sconnettere tutti i cavi attaccati ai collegamenti I/O od alle prese installate
sul retro del sistema.
5.
Qualora si tocchino i componenti, proteggersi dallo scarico elettrostatico (SES),
portando un cinghia anti-statica da polso che è attaccata alla presa a terra del telaio del
sistema – qualsiasi superficie non dipinta – .
6.
Non far operare il sistema quando il telaio è senza le coperture.
Dopo aver seguito i sei passi di SICUREZZA sopracitati, togliere le coperture del telaio del
sistema come seque:
1.
Togliere e mettere in un posto sicuro tutte le viti delle coperture.
2.
Togliere le coperture.
Per il giusto flusso dell’aria e raffreddamento del sistema, rimettere sempre le coperture del
telaio prima di riaccendere il sistema. Operare il sistema senza le coperture al loro proprio
posto potrebbe danneggiare i componenti del sistema. Per rimettere le coperture del telaio:
1.
Controllare prima che non si siano lasciati degli attrezzi o dei componenti dentro il
sistema.
2.
Controllare che i cavi, dei supporti aggiuntivi ed altri componenti siano stati installati
appropriatamente.
3.
Attaccare le coperture al telaio con le viti tolte in precedenza e avvitarle strettamente.
4.
Ricollegare tutti i cavi esterni e le prolunghe AC del sistema.
continua
296
Appendix C Warnings
AVVERTENZA: Italiano (continua)
Se il sistema è stato a lungo in funzione, il microprocessore e il dissipatore di calore
potrebbero essere surriscaldati. Fare attenzione alla presenza di piedini appuntiti e parti
taglienti sulle schede e sul telaio. È consigliabile l'uso di guanti di protezione.
Esiste il pericolo di un esplosione se la pila non viene sostituita in modo corretto. Utilizzare
solo pile uguali o di tipo equivalente a quelle consigliate dal produttore. Per disfarsi delle
pile usate, seguire le istruzioni del produttore.
Il sistema è progettato per funzionare in un ambiente di lavoro tipo. Scegliere una
postazione che sia:
•
Pulita e libera da particelle in sospensione (a parte la normale polvere presente
nell'ambiente).
•
Ben ventilata e lontana da fonti di calore, compresa la luce solare diretta.
•
Al riparo da urti e lontana da fonti di vibrazione.
•
Isolata dai forti campi magnetici prodotti da dispositivi elettrici.
•
In aree soggette a temporali, è consigliabile collegare il sistema ad un limitatore di
corrente. In caso di temporali, scollegare le linee di comunicazione dal modem.
•
Dotata di una presa a muro correttamente installata.
•
Dotata di spazio sufficiente ad accedere ai cavi di alimentazione, i quali rappresentano
il mezzo principale di scollegamento del sistema.
297
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
ADVERTENCIAS: Español
El usuario debe abstenerse de manipular los componentes de la fuente de alimentación de
este producto, cuya reparación debe dejarse exclusivamente en manos de personal técnico
especializado. Puede que este producto disponga de más de una fuente de alimentación.
No intente modificar ni usar el cable de alimentación de corriente alterna, si no corresponde
exactamente con el tipo requerido.
Nótese que el interruptor activado/desactivado en el panel frontal no desconecta la corriente
alterna del sistema. Para desconectarla, deberá desenchufar todos los cables de corriente
alterna de la pared o desconectar la fuente de alimentación.
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD: Cuando extraiga la tapa del chasis para acceder al
interior del sistema, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1.
Apague todos los dispositivos periféricos conectados al sistema.
2.
Apague el sistema presionando el interruptor encendido/apagado.
3.
Desconecte todos los cables de alimentación CA del sistema o de las tomas de
corriente alterna.
4.
Identifique y desconecte todos los cables enchufados a los conectores E/S o a los
puertos situados en la parte posterior del sistema.
5.
Cuando manipule los componentes, es importante protegerse contra la descarga
electrostática (ESD). Puede hacerlo si utiliza una muñequera antiestática sujetada a la
toma de tierra del chasis — o a cualquier tipo de superficie de metal sin pintar.
6.
No ponga en marcha el sistema si se han extraído las tapas del chasis.
Después de completar las seis instrucciones de SEGURIDAD mencionadas, ya puede
extraer las tapas del sistema. Para ello:
1.
Extraiga y guarde todos los tornillos de las tapas.
2.
Extraiga las tapas.
Para obtener un enfriamiento y un flujo de aire adecuados, reinstale siempre las tapas del
chasis antes de poner en marcha el sistema. Si pone en funcionamiento el sistema sin las
tapas bien colocadas puede dañar los componentes del sistema. Para instalar las tapas:
1.
Asegúrese primero de no haber dejado herramientas o componentes sueltos dentro del
sistema.
2.
Compruebe que los cables, las placas adicionales y otros componentes se hayan
instalado correctamente.
3.
Incorpore las tapas al chasis mediante los tornillos extraídos anteriormente,
tensándolos firmemente.
4.
Conecte todos los cables externos y los cables de alimentación CA al sistema.
continúa
298
Appendix C Warnings
ADVERTENCIAS: Español (continúa)
Si el sistema ha estado en funcionamiento, el microprocesador y el disipador de calor
pueden estar aún calientes. También conviene tener en cuenta que en el chasis o en el
tablero puede haber piezas cortantes o punzantes. Por ello, se recomienda precaución y el
uso de guantes protectores.
Existe peligro de explosión si la pila no se cambia de forma adecuada. Utilice solamente
pilas iguales o del mismo tipo que las recomendadas por el fabricante del equipo. Para
deshacerse de las pilas usadas, siga igualmente las instrucciones del fabricante.
El sistema está diseñado para funcionar en un entorno de trabajo normal. Escoja un lugar:
•
Limpio y libre de partículas en suspensión (salvo el polvo normal).
•
Bien ventilado y alejado de fuentes de calor, incluida la luz solar directa.
•
Alejado de fuentes de vibración.
•
Aislado de campos electromagnéticos fuertes producidos por dispositivos eléctricos.
•
En regiones con frecuentes tormentas eléctricas, se recomienda conectar su sistema a
un eliminador de sobrevoltage y desconectar el módem de las líneas de
telecomunicación durante las tormentas.
•
Provisto de una toma de tierra correctamente instalada.
•
Provisto de espacio suficiente como para acceder a los cables de alimentación, ya que
éstos hacen de medio principal de desconexión del sistema.
299
White text
Index
A
AC filter and cable
reinstalling, 159
removing, 158
Acoustic noise, 30
Add-in boards, 146
current limitations, 146
installing, 146
ISA, 57, 146, 148
installing, 148
PCI, 57, 146, 148
removing, 149
Agency certification, 285, 286
B
Back panel, external connectors, 32
Backplanes, peripheral bay, 183
Battery
handling cautions, 258
replacing, 259
BIOS
Setup utility, description, 43
Setup utility, running, 43
special recovery mode, 197
updating, 195
Board management controller, 191
Board set
CPU baseboard, 17
I/O baseboard, 17
I/O riser card, 17
memory module, 17
voltages and currents, 253
brown out feature, 249
C
Cautions, 132, 137, 143, 146, 156
CD-ROM drive
activity LED, 24
headphone jack, 24
mounting screws, 170
open/close button, 24
removing, 168
replacing, 170
slide rails, 170
volume control, 24
Certifications, 285, 286
CFG files, 58
Connecting peripheral devices, 31
Connectors on CPU baseboard
I/O power section, 204, 229
Connectors on I/O riser card
keyboard and mouse ports, 213
parallel port, 214
serial ports, 213
video port, 215
Connectors on memory module
signal section, 244
Connectors on peripheral bay blindmate board
blind mate, 280
diskette drive, 281
IDE, 282
power, 281
Wide SCSI, 283
Connectors on PHP I/O baseboard
32-bit PCI, 205
64-bit PCI, 206
diskette drive port, 208
F16 bus, 201
front panel, 211
I2C, 211
IDE port, 210
ISA, 207
legacy, 212
USB port, 212
wide/fast 16-bit SCSI port, 209
connectors, peripheral bay blindmate, 279
Controllers
board management, 191
diskette drive, 20
front panel, 191
hot-swap, 191
IDE, 190
keyboard/mouse, 20
Symbios 53C896 LVDS, 185
video, 20, 187
301
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Controls and indicators
CD-ROM drive, 24
diskette drive, 24
front panel, 24
status LEDs, hot-docking bays, 24
Cooling and airflow, 119
Cooling system, 18
Covers
front bezel, removing, 121
PCI hot-plug, removing, 123
peripheral bay, removing, 120
removable, 119
top
reinstalling, 123
removing, 121
CPU baseboard, 19
component layout, 222
DC to DC converters, 218
features, 217
front side bus, 219
terminator module, 219
I/O connector
power section, 204, 229
I/O interface, 219
jumpers, 220
changing a setting, 221
processors, 217
reinstalling, 144
removing, 144
SEEPROM, 218
symmetric multiprocessor, 217
CPU tray
reinstalling, 140
removing, 140
Current, usage, 253
D
DC to DC converters, 217, 218
installing, 138
removing, 138
DIMMs
installing, 240
removing, 242
302
Diskette drive
controller, 20
ejector button, 24
removing, 166
replacing, 166
Drive bay, 3.5-inch, 18
Drive fault light, slow blinking, 106
Drive indicators, SCSI
drive active, 106
drive failure, 106
drive present, 106
Drivers
SCSI, installing, 37
video, installing, 37
Drives
CD-ROM, 168
diskette, 165
E
EDO DRAM array, 234
Electromagnetic compatibility, See EMC
EMC
compatibility, 285
notice of test and compliance,
international, 286
Emergency Management Port
FRU viewer, 88
main console window, 82
phonebook, 87
requirements, 80
server control operations, 84
EMI, 18
Environmental specifications, 30
Equipment log, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165,
257, 287
Error messages
beep codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,
276
port 80h codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,
275, 276
POST error codes, 273
ESD, 30, 146
add-in boards, 146
Expansion slots, 186
16-bit ISA, 20
32-bit PCI, 20
64-bit PCI, 20
Index
failure LED, 98
hot swapping, 98
redundant, 98
removing, 97
replacing, 100
fan array housing
reinstalling, 128
removing, 128
Fans, 18, 98
voltage settings, 278
FCC, Class A, 286
Features, server, 18, 19, 20
Front bezel
reinstalling, 121
removing, 121
Front panel
board, 19
reinstalling, 143
removing, 142
controller, 191
switches, 19, 34
Front side bus, 219
terminator module, 20, 219
reinstalling, 135
removing, 135
FRUSDR load utility, when to run, 89
keyboard and mouse ports, 213
parallel port, 214
serial ports, 213
video port, 215
reinstalling, 150
removing, 150
I/O Tray
reinstalling, 152
removing, 152
ICMB
board
reinstalling, 154
removing, 154
bus, 19, 31, 32
IDE
controller, 190
interface, 20
Indicators
cooling fault LED (yellow), 24
drive fault LED (yellow), 24
front panel LCD, 24
power fault LED (yellow), 24
SCSI drive in recovery mode, 106
SCSI drive status descriptions, 106
Interconnect backplane, 20
ISA, 17
add-in board, installing, 148
bus master slot, 146
expansion slot, 186
H
J
Hard disk drive
hot swapping SCSI drive, 106
installing in hot-docking bay, 104
SCSI, 102
hard drives, SCSI, hot-docking, 24
Hot-docking bay, status indicators, 106
Hot-swap controller, 191
Hot-swapping, hard disk drives, 18
Jumpers
boot option, 197
CMOS, 194
CPU baseboard, 220
changing a setting, 221
flash memory, 195
password, 195
F
fan
K
I
I/O baseboard, 20
reinstalling, 156
removing, 156
I/O riser card, 20, 192
connectors, 20
Keyboard, connecting, 31
Keyboard/mouse controller, 20
303
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
L
LCD module
reinstalling, 131
removing, 131
Lights
CD-ROM drive, 24
DC power, 24
diskette drive, 24
power supply, 266
M
Mass storage device
CD-ROM, 168
diskette drive, 165
Memory module, 19
DIMMs, 233
installing, 240
removing, 242
interleaving, 234
reinstalling, 133
removing, 132
Memory module connector
signal section, 244
Messages
beep codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,
276
port 80h codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,
275, 276
POST error codes, 273
midplane
reinstalling, 158
removing, 158
Monitor, connecting, 31
O
Operating systems, 17
OVL files, 57
P
Password
administrative, 26
protection, 26
user, 26
304
PCI, 17
bus master slots, 146
video controller, 187
PCI bus hot-plug covers
reinstalling, 124
peripheral bay backplane, 183
peripheral bay blindmate board
connectors
blind mate, 280
diskette drive, 281
IDE, 282
power, 281
Wide SCSI, 283
Peripheral Bay Cover
reinstalling, 120
Peripheral devices
connecting, 31
floppy disk drive, 43
keyboard, connecting, 31
monitor, connecting, 31
peripherial bay
removing, 159
peripherial bay backplane
reinstalling, 161
removing, 159, 160
peripherial bay blind mate board
reinstalling, 162
removing, 162
PHP I/O baseboard
component layout, 200
connectors
32-bit PCI, 205
64-bit PCI, 206
diskette drive port, 208
F16 bus, 201
front panel, 211
I2C, 211
IDE port, 210
ISA, 207
legacy, 212
USB port, 212
wide/fast 16-bit SCSI port, 209
expansion slots, 185
I/O riser card, 192
IDE controller, 190
ISA expansion slot, 186
jumpers, 193
Index
PHP I/O baseboard (continued)
boot option, 197
flash memory, 195
PCI expansion slots, 186
PCI video controller, 187
server management, 190
Physical specifications, 30
POST
description, 35, 41
running, 35, 41
Power cord, obtaining, 33
Power requirements, 30
Power supply, 18
configuration constraints, 110
failure LED, 110
fan, 18
handles, 29
hot swapping, 110
input voltages, 252
output voltage, 252
redundant, 110
removing, 109
replacing, 112
safety interlock mechanism, 110
warning, 110
Power system, 18, 251
Power usage
calculating, 254
worksheet, 254, 255
power, brown out feature, 249
Power-on self-test, 35, 41
Processor, 19
installing, 137
removing, 137
R
Real-time clock, 258
configuration settings, 43
lithium battery, 258
Recovery mode indicator, SCSI drive, 106
Regulatory specifications
declaration of manufacturer, 285
electromagnetic compatibility, 285
international notices, 286
USA notice, 286
safety compliance, 285
RFI, 18
S
Safety, compliance, 285
SCI files, 58
SCSI
hard disk drive, 102
hot-swapping, 106
indicator, drive in recovery mode, 106
installing in hot-docking bay, 104
status indicator LED locations, 107
status indicators, 106
hot-docking backplane, 20
hot-docking bays, 101
installing drivers, 37
peripheral bay
hard disk drives, 183
peripheral bay backplane
fault indicators, 183
ID addresses, 184
indicator LEDs, 183
power control, 183
temperature sensor, 183
singled-ended devices, 102
Security, 26
boot sequence control, 26
boot without keyboard, 27
diskette write protect, 27
emergency management port, 27
locked power and reset switches, 27
password protection, 26
secure boot mode, 26
setup utility, 26
system setup utility (SSU), 26
video blanking, 27
Server
after unpacking, 31
back panel, 32
board set, 17
boot from CD, 36
chassis, 18
cooling and airflow, 119
copy software to diskettes, 37
dimensions and weight, 30
features, 18, 19, 20
install SCSI drivers, 37
install video drivers, 37
major components, 21
management, 19, 190
305
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
Server (continued)
on-site installation, 29
won’t boot from CD, 38
Setup utility, running, 43
Specifications
environmental, 30
physical, 30
SSU, See system setup utility
Status indicators
drive activity LED (green), 24
drive fault LED (yellow), 24
drive power LED (green), 24
SCSI drives, 106
Supplies, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165, 257
Switches
DC power, 261, 262
NMI, 24
power, 24
reset, 24, 261
server power, 110
system power, 33, 41, 121
Symmetric multiprocessor, 217
System setup utility, 31
CFG files, 58
customizing, 60
defining an ISA card, 63
exiting, 74
launching a task, 60
location, 57
OVL files, 57
removing an ISA card, 64
running, 59
locally, 58
remotely, 59
SCI files, 58
when to run, 57
T
Tools, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165, 257
Troubleshooting
additional procedures, 264
application software, 269
beep codes, 267, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,
275, 276
checklist, 262, 263
cooling fans, 266
DC power switch, 262
306
floppy drive light, 268
hard drive light, 268
initial system startup, 262
new software, 263
no characters on screen, 267
operating system prompt, 265
power distribution backplane, 269
screen characters incorrect, 267
server lights, 265
server problems, 263
checklist, 263
specific problems
corrective actions, 265
power light, 266
video display, 267
U
USB ports, 20, 185
Utilities
BIOS setup, 43
FRUSDR load utility, 89
SCSISelect, 41
V
Video
controller, 20, 187
drivers, installing, 37
standard VGA modes, 187
W
Warnings
translations
English, 290
French, 292
German, 294
Italian, 296
Spanish, 298
vacant power supply bay, 110
Weight of server, 29
X
XICMB, bus, 191, 214